Lucent Technologies MERLIN LEGEND Release 6.0 System Programming Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Lucent Technologies Manuals
  4. Telephone System
  5. MERLIN LEGEND Release 6.0
  6. System programming manual
Lucent Technologies MERLIN LEGEND Release 6.0 System Programming Manual

Lucent Technologies MERLIN LEGEND Release 6.0 System Programming Manual

Communications system
Hide thumbs Also See for MERLIN LEGEND Release 6.0:
1
2
3
Table Of Contents
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual See also: Installation Manual
MERLIN LEGEND

Communications System

Release 6.0
System Programming
®
555-660-111
Comcode 108136086
Issue 1
February 1998

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the MERLIN LEGEND Release 6.0 and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Related Manuals for Lucent Technologies MERLIN LEGEND Release 6.0

Summary of Contents for Lucent Technologies MERLIN LEGEND Release 6.0

  • Page 1: Communications System

    ® MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Comcode 108136086 Issue 1 February 1998...
  • Page 2 Lucent Technologies does not warrant that this product is immune from or will prevent unauthorized use of common-carrier telecommunication services or fa- cilities accessed through or connected to it.
  • Page 3 -xxi. Support Telephone Number In the continental U.S., Lucent Technologies provides a toll-free customer helpline 24 hours a day. Call the Lucent Technologies Helpline at 1 800 628-2888 or your Lucent Technologies authorized dealer if you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system. Consultation charges may apply.

  • Page 4: Table Of Contents

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Contents Page iv Contents Figures Tables About This Book xvii Intended Audience xvii How to Use This Book xvii Terms and Conventions Used xviii Security Related Documents How to Comment on This Book xxii Programming Basics...
  • Page 5 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Contents Page v Optional Extension Features 3-93 Optional Group Features 3-140 Optional Group Calling Features 3-156 System Features 3-192 Night Service 3-242 Labeling 3-256 Print Reports 3-271 Memory Card 3-279 Programming Procedures...
  • Page 6 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Contents Page vi Centralized Telephone Programming Introduction Access to Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Copy Extension 5-13 Feature Quick Reference 5-18 Customer Support Information Support Telephone Number Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Electromagnetic Interference Information...
  • Page 7 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Contents Page vii Label Information Report F-12 Tie Trunk Information Report F-13 DID Trunk Information Report F-14 GS/LS Trunk Information Report F-15 General Trunk Information Report F-16 Switch 56 Data Information Report F-17 DS1 Information Report...
  • Page 8 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Contents Page viii Programming Special Characters Single-Line Telephones Analog Multiline Telephones MLX-10 and MLX-5 Nondisplay Telephones MLX Display Telephones Glossary GL-1 Index IN-1...

  • Page 9: Figures

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Figures Page ix Figures Programming Basics 1–1 MLX-20L Telephone with Direct Station Selector (DSS) 1–2 Display Buttons and Main Menu 1–3 Console Overlay 1–4 Selecting a Block of Lines/Trunks 1–5 Information Screen 1-12...
  • Page 10 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Figures Page x Programming Procedures 4–1 2-Digit Numbering 4-15 4–2 3-Digit Numbering 4-16 4–3 Set Up Space Numbering 4-16 4–4 PCMCIA Memory Card 4-441 4–5 Inserting the Memory Card 4-442 Button Diagrams E–1...
  • Page 11 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Tables Page xi Tables Programming Basics 1–1 Fixed Display Buttons 1–2 Screen Keys 1-20 1–3 System Programming Menu Options 1-45 1–4 Exiting System Programming 1-46 Programming with SPM 2–1 SPM Configuration File (ams.cfg) Options.
  • Page 12 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Tables Page xii Programming Procedures 4–1 Switched 56 Data Signaling Options 4-91 4–2 Timers and Counters 4-199 4–3 Special Services Table 4-225 4–4 Timers 4-247 4–5 Other Data Programming Procedures 4-431 4–6 Programming through Integrated Administration...
  • Page 13 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Tables Page xiii Programming Special Characters H–1 Special Characters for Single-Line Telephones H–2 Special Characters for Analog Multiline Telephones H-2 H–3 Special Characters for MLX-10 and MLX-5 Nondisplay Telephones H–4 Special Characters for MLX Display Telephones...
  • Page 14 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Tables Page xiv...

  • Page 15: Important Safety Instructions

    Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone wiring has been disconnected at the network interface. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Use only Lucent Technologies-manufactured MERLIN LEGEND Communications System circuit modules, carrier assemblies, and power units in the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System control unit.

  • Page 16: Save These Instructions

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Page xvi The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System requires a supplementary ground. Do not attach the power supply cord to building surfaces. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it.

  • Page 17: About This Book

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 About This Book Intended Audience Page xvii About This Book The power and versatility of the MERLIN LEGEND Communication System is due in part to its many options and features. These options and features have been recorded on system planning forms and initially programmed at the time of installation.

  • Page 18: Terms And Conventions Used

    Terms and Conventions Used Page xviii In the USA only, Lucent Technologies provides a toll-free customer Helpline (1 800 628-2888) 24 hours a day. Call the Helpline, or your Lucent Technologies representative, if you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system.
  • Page 19 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 About This Book Terms and Conventions Used Page xix Typographical Conventions Certain type fonts and styles act as visual cues to help you rapidly understand the information presented: Example Purpose It is very important that you follow these...

  • Page 20: Security

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 About This Book Security Page xx Security Certain features of the system can be protected by passwords to prevent unauthorized users from abusing the system. You should assign passwords wherever you can and limit knowledge of such passwords to three or fewer people.

  • Page 21: Related Documents

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 About This Book Related Documents Page xxi Related Documents In addition to this book, the documents listed below are part of the documentation set. Within the continental United States, these can be ordered from the Lucent Technologies Customer Information Center by calling 1 800 457-1235.

  • Page 22: How To Comment On This Book

    If the feedback form is missing, write directly to: Documentation Manager Lucent Technologies 211 Mount Airy Road, Room 2W226 Basking Ridge, NJ 07920...

  • Page 23: Programming Basics

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Introduction to System Programming Page 1-1 Programming Basics This chapter presents the information you need to master before you begin the programming procedures covered in Chapter 3, “Common Administrative Procedures”...
  • Page 24 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Introduction to System Programming Page 1-2 Planning Forms Before you begin to program or modify your communications system, you should familiarize yourself with the system planning forms. Initially, system planning forms are used to plan your communications system and program your system during installation.

  • Page 25: System Programming Console

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics System Programming Console Page 1-3 — A PC with System Programming and Maintenance (SPM) software. SPM emulates a system programming console on your PC. The PC should be connected to the lower port (labeled ADMIN) on the processor module.

  • Page 26: Mlx-20L Telephone With Direct Station Selector (Dss)

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics System Programming Console Page 1-4 Call and Fixed-Feature Buttons Button Labeling Card Display Buttons Direct Handset Station Selector Display Screen (DSS) Home More Menu Inspct MLX-20L Volume Feature...
  • Page 27 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics System Programming Console Page 1-5 Console Components Refer to Figure 1–1 for the location of the components described below. MLX-20L Console Components Desk Stand An adjustable stand on the console and the DSS, allows a 20- or 30-degree (not shown) viewing angle.
  • Page 28 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics System Programming Console Page 1-6 DSS Components Covers Removable plastic covers to protect the designation cards. The top cover protects the 50 DSS button labels. The lower cover fits over the fixed buttons.

  • Page 29: Display Buttons And Main Menu

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics System Programming Console Page 1-7 Console Buttons Use the 14 buttons located on either side of the console display area for system programming. These buttons are arranged in two columns of seven buttons, as shown in Figure 1–2.

  • Page 30: Console Overlay

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics System Programming Console Page 1-8 Unlabeled Display Buttons Use the five unlabeled display buttons on each side of the screen to select commands, options, or items on the screen. The functions of these buttons vary, based on the option you select.

  • Page 31: Selecting A Block Of Lines/Trunks

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics System Programming Console Page 1-9 Line 1 Line 21 Line 14 Line 34 / 25 / 30 5 25 45 65 1O 30 50 70 15 35 55 75 20 40 60 80 14 / 34...

  • Page 32: Programming Procedures

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-10 Console and DSS Lights The red and green lights (LEDs) next to each of the 20 line buttons show the status of the line/trunk options. LEDs on the DSS show the status of features programmed on extensions.
  • Page 33 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-11 Procedure Contents Each procedure begins with a general description of the feature, followed by a summary of programming information that includes the items listed below. Programmable by Indicates who has permission to use the procedure.

  • Page 34: Information Screen

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-12 Your system information appears in ’s. place of the Figure 1–5. Information Screen Ç You cannot make changes on an information screen. Select on the PC) to continue to the next screen in the procedure.

  • Page 35: Data Entry Screen

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-13 Option Selected Prompt Data Entry Area Figure 1–7. Data Entry Screen A data entry screen prompts you to enter specific data or to make specific choices.

  • Page 36: Inspect Example

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-14 Verifying Data Entry You can use the Inspect feature to view the entries you save. An example of how to use the Inspect feature begins with Figure 1–8.
  • Page 37 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-15 Using the Programming Procedures This section contains specific information about how to make the best use of the programming procedures. Make certain that you read and understand the information presented here before you begin any system programming procedures.
  • Page 38 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-16 Console/Display Instructions Header In most cases, the screen shown in the console display area contains the results of the previous step. A step with no screen indicates that you should look at the preceding step.
  • Page 39 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-17 Branching Many of the procedures contain features that have multiple programming options, while other procedures show more than one way to program a particular feature. To accommodate both of these programming methods, the procedures use branching.

  • Page 40: Programming Basics

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-18 The first branch procedure from sample Step 3 is shown below. AT&T Toll Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify a service. !  xx = number entered in Step 5 Ã...
  • Page 41 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-19 Single or Block Items Branching is also used when you can select between programming a single item or a block of items, such as a single line or a block of lines, as shown in sample Step 5.

  • Page 42: Screen Keys

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-20 Saving Entries and Moving among Screens At the bottom of each screen are one or more screen keys with functions that allow you to change your entry, save your entry, or return to a previous screen.
  • Page 43 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-21 Table 1–2. Screen Keys (Continued) Display Function Program sequentially numbered items. If you are programming a group of sequentially numbered extensions, lines, or trunks, you may have the option to select on the PC).
  • Page 44 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-22 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the extension. !  7DTCA6DÃ@‘‡r†v‚†) @‡r…Ãr‘‡r†v‚† ‘‘‘‘ 9ryr‡r 7hpx†ƒhpr à @‘v‡ @‡r… SP: “Entering an Extension” Assign or remove BIS/HFAI capability.
  • Page 45 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-23 Using Next When you are programming a feature that can apply to a sequence of extensions, lines/trunks, or groups, the screen key appears on the console display.
  • Page 46 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-24 System Programming Hierarchy The following table shows all of the options that are available under each of the System Programming main menu options displayed on the system programming console.
  • Page 47 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-25 Description Page SysRenumber Continued Single Single extension renumbering 3–14 * Lines Lines/Trunks * Extensions Extensions * Pools Pools (Hybrid/PBX only) * Group Page Paging Group * GrpCalling Calling Group...
  • Page 48 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-26 Description Page Operator Continued * Call Types QCC Operator to Receive Call Types 3–46 - Dial 0 Dial 0 Calls - Priority - Operator - Follow/Frwd Forward/Follow Me Calls...
  • Page 49 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-27 Description Page LinesTrunks Lines/Trunks options LS/GS/DS1 Loop-start, ground-start or DS1 options * (DS1) DS1 options - Type Type of DS1 facility 4–87 - T1 - GroundStart...
  • Page 50 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-28 Description Page LinesTrunks Continued -PRI Primary Rate Interface 4–165 - Frame Format - D4 Compatible - Extended Super Frame -Suppression Type of zero code suppression 4–112 - AMI ZCS - B8ZS...
  • Page 51 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-29 Description Page LinesTrunks Continued Tie Lines * Direction Tie trunks direction 4–121 - Two Way - OutGoing - Incoming * Intype Signaling type: incoming tie trunk.
  • Page 52 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-30 Description Page LinesTrunks Continued TT/LS Disc * OutMode Outmode Signaling for loop- or ground-start trunks 4–33 * LS Disconnect Disconnect signaling reliability 4–43 - Yes - No...
  • Page 53 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-31 Description Page LinesTrunks Continued - 5ESS Local Local service - OUTWATS - 56/64 Digit - VirtPrivNet - INWATS - MCI Toll - Misc Miscellaneous network service - Other...
  • Page 54 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-32 Description Page LinesTrunks Continued *DialPlanRtg Dial Plan Routing 4–206 - Service Service - AT&T Toll AT&T toll service - Megacom 800 - ACCUNET SDS - SoftDefNetw - MULTI QUEST...
  • Page 55 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-33 Description Page LinesTrunks Continued - CBC Service Call-by-Call service 4–231 - Patterns - Voice Data - Voice Only - Data Only - Voice/Data - NetworkServ Network service...
  • Page 56 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-34 Description Page LinesTrunks Continued - ARS Restrict Non-Tie trunk ARS Facility Restriction Level - Allow List Non-Tie trunk Allowed Lists assignment - DisallowLst Non-Tie trunk Disallowed Lists assignment * TIE Lines...
  • Page 57 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-35 Description Page LinesTrunks Continued Clock Sync Clock Synchronization (100D or 800 NI-BRI modules) 4–66 * Primary Primary Clock - Loop - Local * Secondary Secondary Clock - Loop...
  • Page 58 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-36 Description Page Extensions LinesTrunks Lines or trunks (buttons on a telephone) 3–65 Line Copy Copy outside line/trunk options 3–71 * Single * Block Dial OutCd Pool dial-out code restrictions...
  • Page 59 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-37 Description Page Extensions Grp Calling Calling group members and options 3–150 * Hunt Type Hunt Type 3–156 - Circular - Linear - Most Idle * Delay Announce Group Calling delay announcement...
  • Page 60 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-38 Description Page Options Transfer Transfer options * Return Time Transfer return time (number of rings) 3–193 * One Touch One Touch Transfer/One Touch Hold 3–195 - Transfer - Manual...
  • Page 61 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-39 Description Page Options Continued Recall Timer Length of timed flash sent when Recall is used 3–230 * 350 ms * 450 ms * 650 ms * 1 sec Rotary...
  • Page 62 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-40 Description Page Tables Continued * Dial 0 Dial 0 Table 4–393 - ARS Pool - ARS FRL - ARS Digits * Sub A Data Voice and/or data routing for Subpattern A 4–398 - Voice Only...
  • Page 63 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-41 Description Page NightSrvce GroupAssign Night Service group assignment 3–242 * Extensions * Calling Grp OutRestrict Password for use with out of hours calls 3–246 Emergency Emergency numbers free from password requirement...
  • Page 64 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-42 Description Page Print Print system reports 3–273 Print all reports SysSet-up System Information report Dial Plan Dial Plan report Non-Locl UDP Non-Local Dial Plan report Labels Label Information report...

  • Page 65: Access To System Programming From The Mlx-20L Console

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Access to System Programming from the MLX-20L Console Page 1-43 Description Page Language Language options SystemLang System language 3–5 * English * French * Spanish Extensions Language for a single extension or block of 3–94...
  • Page 66 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Access to System Programming from the MLX-20L Console Page 1-44 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Display the Menu Mode (main menu) screen. !  Press Menu Select System Programming.

  • Page 67: System Programming Menu Options

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Access to System Programming from the MLX-20L Console Page 1-45 System Programming Menu Figure 1–11 shows the two screens that make up the System Programming menu. Table 1–3 describes the options.

  • Page 68: Idle States

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Idle States Page 1-46 Figure 1–11. System Programming Menu Screens Exiting System Programming Use the information in Table 1–4 to return to the System Programming menu, the main menu (Menu Mode screen), or the Home screen from within a programming screen.

  • Page 69: System Busy Screen

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Idle States Page 1-47 If a procedure requires that the system be idle and the system is busy when you begin, you see the screen shown in Figure 1–12.
  • Page 70 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Idle States Page 1-48 Line or Trunk Idle Because these procedures require the line or trunk to be idle only at the instant of programming, the line or trunk is not forced idle (as described in the previous paragraph).
  • Page 71 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-49 Forced Idle Reminder Tones The forced idle reminder tone is a high-low “doorphone” tone 400 ms of 667-Hz tone followed by 400 ms of 571-Hz tone. The tone is provided under the following circumstances: At the extension, to remind the user that the system or the extension is in the forced idle state...

  • Page 72: Telephones

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-50 MLX-10D, MLX-20L, and MLX-28D display telephones and MLX-10 nondisplay telephones are available in three separate versions, with factory-set buttons in English, Spanish, or French. (The MLX-10DP is available in the English version only.) In addition, user and operator guides and telephone tray cards are available in all three languages.
  • Page 73 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-51 PF Registration PF registration number AS5USA-65646-PF-E is assigned by the FCC for operating the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System in Hybrid/PBX mode in the United States.
  • Page 74 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-52 When AUDIX Voice Power sends a Leave Message notification to an extension, the system identifies the voice mail system as the sender of the message.
  • Page 75 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-53 Primary Rate Interface (PRI) Primary Rate Interface (PRI) enhancements include the following: Connectivity to the 5ESS Generic 6 Multiple incoming calls to directory number Call-by-Call Service Selection Password handling for FTS2000 Extension ID as Calling Party Number for Automatic Number ID (ANI)

  • Page 76: Product Enhancements

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-54 A call put on hold at a Cover button can be picked up by any person who has a personal line for the call. Calls that have been put on hold at a Cover, SA, Shared SA, or Pool button can be picked up by a person who has a personal line button for the call.
  • Page 77 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-55 Installation and Hardware Installation and hardware enhancements include the following: The control unit covers for the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System are the same easy-to-use covers as those for the MERLIN II Communications System.
  • Page 78 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-56 Additional Application Packages, Telephones, Adjuncts, and Adapter Additional application packages, adjuncts, and adapter enhancements include the following: A Digital Announcer Unit, compatible with all call management systems and tip/ring applications currently available for the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System.
  • Page 79 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-57 Release 3.0 Enhancements Release 3.0 includes all Release 2.1 functionality plus the enhancements listed below. Equipment New hardware includes a variety of components. Additional details are included elsewhere in this book.
  • Page 80 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-58 Installation, Upgrade Administration, and Maintenance These are the new MERLIN LEGEND Communications System capabilities: SPM (Release 3.18) conversion of translations from Release 1.0, 1.1, 2.0, and 2.1 to 3.0 Remote operation at 1200/2400bps Advice and feedback administration screens for new Release 3.0...
  • Page 81 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-59 Caller ID Caller information (telephone number) is furnished to MLX display telephones by an 800 GS/LS-ID module using the LS (loop-start) option. This allows customers to screen calls before answering the phone, as well as providing calling party information for use with various applications.
  • Page 82 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-60 Additional Application Packages, Adjuncts, and Adapter Enhancements PassageWay Direct Connection Solution PassageWay Direct Connection Solution (Release 2.0) is a computer telephony integrated product that links a desktop Windows PC to the MERLIN LEGEND Communication System’s MLX-10DP, MLX-20L, or MLX-28D telephone.
  • Page 83 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-61 Release 3.1 Enhancements Release 3.1 includes all Release 3.0 functionality plus the enhancements listed below. Security Features New security features include a variety of components. Additional details are included elsewhere in this book.
  • Page 84 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-62 Pool Dial-Out Code Restriction by Default The default setting for the Pool Dial-Out Code restriction has changed to restricted. No extension or remote access user with a barrier code has access to pools until the restriction is removed by the system manager.
  • Page 85 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-63 Release 4.0 Enhancements Release 4.0 includes all Release 3.1 functionality plus the enhancements listed below: Equipment 016 Tip/Ring Module This module supports the 200-extension dial plan by providing 16 ports for tip/ring devices.
  • Page 86 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-64 Support for T1 Digital Data Transmission Release 4.0 expands its T1 functionality by providing access to digital data over the public switched 56 kbps network in addition to data Tie-Trunk services. Users who have T1 facilities for voice services can now use them for video calls at data rates of 56 kbps per channel (112 kbps for video calls using two channels).
  • Page 87 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-65 Single-Line Telephone Enhancements Disable Transfer. Through centralized telephone programming, the system manager can disable the ability to transfer calls by removing from the telephone all but one SA or ICOM button.
  • Page 88 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-66 Night Service with Coverage Control Beginning with Release 4.1, a system manager can enable the Night Service Coverage Control option to automatically control the status of telephones programmed with Coverage VMS (voice messaging system) Off buttons, according to Night Service status.
  • Page 89 Network-1 Basic Rate Interface) Provisioning Test Tool is enhanced to include testing for BRI facilities that are part of Multiline Hunt Groups (MLHGs). The NI-1 BRI Provisioning Test Tool is used by Lucent Technologies maintenance personnel on MERLIN LEGEND Communications Systems that include a 800 NI-BRI module.
  • Page 90 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-68 LEC services for DMS-100 switch types: — DMS Virtual Private Network service for calls between the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System and another communications system (such as another MERLIN LEGEND Communications System) —...
  • Page 91 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-69 MERLIN LEGEND Reporter MERLIN LEGEND Reporter provides basic call accounting system reports for all incoming calls to Auto Login or Auto Logout type calling groups. MERLIN LEGEND Reporter assists in determining the effectiveness of calling group agents, assessing the level of service provided to callers, and ascertaining whether adequate incoming phone lines and agents are available to handle peak-...

  • Page 92: (Hybrid/Pbx Mode

    A PassageWay Telephony Services CTI link from the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System to a LAN server running Novell® NetWare® software allows Lucent Technologies-certified telephony applications to control and monitor MLX and analog multiline telephone (BIS only) operations. The physical connection for the CTI link is an MLX port on a 008 MLX or 408 MLX module on the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System control unit and ISDN link interface card plugged into the customer’s server.
  • Page 93 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-71 Screen Pop Screen pop occurs when the calling number, called number, or other user-defined identifier (such as account code that a voice-response unit prompts the caller to dial) is used to display a screen associated with the far-end party.
  • Page 94 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-72 HotLine Feature The Release 5.0 HotLine feature is designed for retail sales, catalogue sales, and other types of businesses and organizations and is available in all three modes of system operation.
  • Page 95 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-73 Delay Announcement Devices The system manager can designate as many as ten primary delay announcement devices per group rather than the single device for each group that is available in Release 4.2 and earlier systems.
  • Page 96 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-74 If the number of waiting calls is greater than or equal to the highest value, Threshold 3, the LED lights steadily. NOTE: A DSS (Direct Station Selector) button that is used as a Calls-in-Queue Alarm button can only indicate two threshold levels,...
  • Page 97 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-75 Available for Hybrid/PBX mode systems, the private network features of the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 provide the following advantages for geographically dispersed organizational sites: Intersystem Calling.
  • Page 98 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-76 — You order a point to point T1 facility from a service provider, then use system programming to set it up for PRI signalling. As necessary, a service provider can provide amplification on the T1 facility, but does not supply switching services.
  • Page 99 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-77 Queue control also applies to internal calls to a DGC group and calls to a calling group through the QCC. Æ Æ' Internal calls that dial and are directed to a calling group...
  • Page 100 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-78 The system must be equipped with analog loop-start Centrex lines and a ll loop-start lines in the system must be Centrex facilities. Loop-start lines do not have to provide reliable disconnect for use by the Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding feature.

  • Page 101: Programming With Spm

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Page 2-1 Programming with SPM The System Programming and Maintenance (SPM) software package offers an alternate method of programming the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System using a PC.

  • Page 102: System Requirements

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM System Requirements Page 2-2 This book describes the use of SPM on a PC with a DOS operating system. If your system includes the Intuity or IS II/III applications, you have the UNIX System version of SPM.
  • Page 103 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Page 2-3 Direct local connection, if the PC is more than 50 ft. from the control unit. — 355AF adapter —...
  • Page 104 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Page 2-4 DOS Installation Use the following procedure to install SPM on the hard drive of a DOS PC. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: If you are updating SPM, you do not need to remove the current SPM files.
  • Page 105 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Page 2-5 Creates the following directories if they do not already exist: — c:\spm\backup — c:\spm\reports — c:\spm\tmp Does one of the following: —...
  • Page 106 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Page 2-6 DOS Installation with Windows 95 Using DOS SPM with Windows 95 improves the interaction of SPM with the operating system as compared to Windows 3.x installation.

  • Page 107: Installing The Spm Software

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Page 2-7 Installation With Windows 95 running on your PC, follow these steps to install SPM on the PC’s hard drive: Insert a backup copy of SPM in any floppy disk drive (usually the A drive).
  • Page 108 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Page 2-8 If your PC does not have a copy of PRINT.EXE in any directory listed in your system’s PATH environment, the following message appears: Press any key to continue installation.
  • Page 109 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Page 2-9 Configuring a PIF file for DOS SPM Refer to the Windows 95 Help topic, “PIF editor,” for details about using the PIF editor to implement an SPM PIF file to work with the spm.exe file.

  • Page 110: Spm Configuration File (Ams.cfg) Options

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Page 2-10 NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: attribute is also specified in ams.cfg as (off), the DEBUG default setting, or (on). This attribute is used to enable the Escape- to-Shell feature of SPM, activated by pressing .
  • Page 111 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Page 2-11 The screens shown in Steps 3 through 7 appear only if the system has not been initialized. Otherwise, the screen shown in Step 8 appears. Select the serial communications port used for SPM and press !  Type...
  • Page 112 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Page 2-12 The language you select here becomes the SPM (PC) language. Review your selections. !  x = the values entered for each entry in Steps 3 through 6 To change any of the information shown, type and press...

  • Page 113: Connecting The Pc

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Connecting the PC Page 2-13 Connecting the PC There are three ways to connect the PC to the control unit. Choose the method below that is most useful for your installation. Direct local connection Local modem connection Remote modem connection...

  • Page 114: Direct Local Connection, Pc More Than 50 Ft. Away

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Connecting the PC Page 2-14 Processor Module SMDR Jack ADMIN Jack 355AF Adapter Crossover Cable EIA-232-D Tu rn po we ins ert r be for e ing or ov ing...

  • Page 115: Local Modem Connection

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Connecting the PC Page 2-15 Local Modem Connection For a local modem connection, you must use a modem (either connected to, or built into, the PC) to access the internal modem in the control unit. Connect the modem to an 012 or 016 module in the control unit, as shown in Figure 2–3.

  • Page 116: Accessing Spm

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Accessing SPM Page 2-16 Incoming Public or private trunk line telephone network Serial Communications Port RS-232 MODEM Tu rn po we ins ert r be for e mo du ovi ng...
  • Page 117 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Accessing SPM Page 2-17 Set up the appropriate physical connections between the PC and the control !  unit. “Connecting the PC” on page 13. If you installed SPM on the hard disk of the PC, go to Step 5.
  • Page 118 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Accessing SPM Page 2-18 With a Local or Remote Modem Connection The method you use to access SPM by modem depends on whether you are programming on site (locally) or from a remote location.
  • Page 119 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Accessing SPM Page 2-19 The password prompt appears on the screen when the connection is made. (You may have to press more than once to get the password prompt.) If the PC is in a remote location and your system has not activated the Remote Access feature, do the following:...
  • Page 120 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Accessing SPM Page 2-20 Type the SPM password to display the SPM Main Menu shown in Step 6. !  The password does not display as you type it. To select an option, press the function key that corresponds to the option you !  want.

  • Page 121: Using Spm

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-21 Using SPM This section describes how to use the SPM screens, SPM Help, and the SPM options listed below. Backup Boards Browse Convert...

  • Page 122: Spm Display

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-22 Figure 2–5. SPM Display through , and through display on either side of the console simulation window. They represent the function keys to use when you select screen options.

  • Page 123: Function Of Pc Keys In Spm

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-23 Table 2–2. Function of PC Keys in SPM PC Key Console SPM Function Quit. Exit from SPM and return to the DOS Home prompt when you finish with system programming.
  • Page 124 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-24 Table 2–2. Continued PC Key Console SPM Function Escape to shell. To use this key sequence, you must set DEBUG=1 in the configuration file ams.cfg.

  • Page 125: Spm Main Menu Options

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-25 SPM Main Menu Options The SPM Main Menu provides access to system programming and to the SPM functions listed in Table 2–3.

  • Page 126: Spm Help

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-26 SPM Help To access the SPM help screens, press To review the help screens press, To return to the first help screen, press To exit from SPM help, press A typical help screen is shown in Figure...

  • Page 127: Backup Header: Release Number

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-27 Backup The Backup procedure is used by qualified service personnel to create a file of system programming information either in the \spm\backup directory (on the hard drive of the PC) or in the root directory of a diskette (on the floppy disk drive of the PC).
  • Page 128 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-28 Considerations Review the following items before you begin the backup procedure: The communications system does not have to be idle during backup; however, extension programming is blocked.
  • Page 129 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-29 Remove the SPM diskette and insert a formatted diskette. Use the arrow keys to !  highlight and press After you press , the statement shown above changes to and the directory listing for A:\ is displayed.
  • Page 130 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-30 Verify that the filename chosen does not already exist. !  The following screen appears only if the filename chosen already exists. Continue with Step 7 if this screen does not appear.
  • Page 131 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-31 To abort the backup press to return to the SPM Main Menu. !  When the backup is complete, press to return to the SPM Main Menu.

  • Page 132: Board Types

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-32 NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: If you remove a board but do not replace it, and then perform a board renumber, the control unit will not recognize any boards that follow the empty slot.
  • Page 133 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-33 Follow the steps below to assign modules. At the SPM Main Menu, press to select !  Press the function key that corresponds to the module you want to select. !  If the module you want to assign is not shown on the first screen of the Boards menu, press...
  • Page 134 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-34 Assign or remove the module from the slot entered in Step 3. !  module name = option selected in Step 2 nn = slot entered in Step 3 To remove the module type from the specified slot number, press ).
  • Page 135 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-35 Browse The Browse option allows you to browse through reports saved in the Reports directory (\spm\reports) on the hard disk of the PC or on a floppy. At the SPM Main Menu press !  FILENAME.XXX and FILENAME.YYY from the \spm\reports directory...
  • Page 136 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-36 Convert The Convert option (which can be used remotely) simplifies upgrading from an earlier release to a current release of the communications system (see “Upgrading the System”...
  • Page 137 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-37 At the SPM Main Menu, press to begin the conversion. !  Follow the instructions for a floppy or a hard disk. !  A second window appears which displays the BPUPÃAGPQQ` option and a directory listing for the C:\spm\backup directory.
  • Page 138 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-38 Use the arrow keys to highlight the name of the backup file to be converted and !  press If the backup file you select is a 6.0 backup, it cannot be converted. The following message appears: AvyrÃuh†Ãhy…rhq’ÃirrÃp‚‰r…‡rq Q…r††Ã@‡r…Ç‚Ãp‚‡vˆr...
  • Page 139 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-39 Use the arrow keys to highlight and press !  After you press , the statement shown above changes to and the directory listing from the root directory of the disk in Drive A appears.
  • Page 140 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-40 The converted file cannot have the same name as the file from which you converted. If you specify the same filename, the following screen appears: Press and repeat this step.
  • Page 141 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-41 Language A language attribute in the SPM configuration file \spm\ams.cfg (DOS version) or /usr/ams/ams.cfg (UNIX System version) specifies whether SPM menus, pop-up windows, and other messages are presented in English, French, or Spanish.
  • Page 142 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-42 Press the function key that corresponds to your language selection. !  The Display Language screen reappears, with the language you selected. Press to return to the SPM Main Menu or select another language.

  • Page 143: Pass-Thru

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-43 Remote Direct Connection Connection Turn power before inserti remov ng or modu AG INPUT AG INPUT SPM PC Control Unit IS II/III PC Figure 2–7.
  • Page 144 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-44 If the IS II/III PC does not respond to the Pass-Thru request from the control unit (for example, because the PC is turned off), you see the following message: If the connection between the control unit and the IS II/III PC fails, the connection between the control unit and the SPM PC is dropped.
  • Page 145 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-45 Type the IS II/III password and press !  Type for the terminal emulation type and press !  If you are working with IS II, the IS II main menu appears. If you are working with IS III, the system prompts you for your login registration.
  • Page 146 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-46 At the SPM Main Menu, press to select !  Type the old (current) password. Do not press !  If you type the old password incorrectly, the bottom of the screen displays the message .
  • Page 147 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-47 Type the new password again. Do not press !  Press to return to the SPM Main Menu. !  Print Options The Print Opts option allows qualified service personnel to direct the output of system programming reports either to the PC (where you can save them, browse...
  • Page 148 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-48 Select the target device for the reports. !  Press to return to the SPM Main Menu. !  SMDR Port Output “Printing System Reports”...
  • Page 149 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-49 Restore is terminated under the following conditions: If fewer boards are listed on the disk than on the control unit If any real board is out of sequence with the boards listed on the disk If phantom boards are not listed last If the operating mode of the system being restored is Hybrid/PBX, but the...
  • Page 150 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-50 Use the arrow keys to highlight and press !  After you press , the statement shown above changes to .

  • Page 151: System Programming

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM System Programming Page 2-51 When the restore completes, press to return to the SPM Main Menu. !  xxxx = number of blocks sent YYYY System Programming A primary function of SPM is to provide a method for programming the...
  • Page 152 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM System Programming Page 2-52 In most cases, you will be at an intermediate step in the procedure you have just completed. At that point, you can select one of the options shown on the screen and continue programming, or you can press @‘v‡...
  • Page 153 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM System Programming Page 2-53 Identify telephones with voice signal pairs for the Voice Announce to Busy feature Identify telephones that need the Simultaneous Voice and Data feature Restore system programming information Identify the Music On Hold jack When the system is forced idle, the following occurs: multiline telephone users...
  • Page 154 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM System Programming Page 2-54 Forced Idle Reminder Tone The forced idle reminder tone is a high-low “door-phone” tone 400 ms of 667 Hz tone followed by 400 ms of 571 Hz tone. The tone is provided under the following circumstances: At the extension, to remind the user that the system or the extension is in the forced idle state...
  • Page 155 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM System Programming Page 2-55 Printing Reports Use the following procedure to print system reports using SPM at the PC. The must be set to .
  • Page 156 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM System Programming Page 2-56 Observe the print status screen. !  You can press to interrupt printing and return to the SPM Main Menu. Print Hard Copy To print a hard copy of the report, use the arrow keys to highlight and press...

  • Page 157: Upgrading The System

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-57 Upgrading the System WARNING: The following procedures are to be used by qualified technicians or service personnel only. Installation or maintenance of this product by anyone other than qualified personnel may damage or impair the product;...
  • Page 158 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-58 Before You Begin Before you begin the upgrade to Release 6.0, you will need the items listed below. SPM Version 6.15 or later to back up and convert system programming information and to restore system programming information after the processor module has been upgraded.

  • Page 159: Programming Compatibility

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-59 Table 2–6. Programming Compatibility Program Restore on Version Backup from 1.0 2.0/2.1 4.1/4.2 5.0 1.13 1.16 2.09 2.16 yes* 3.18 yes* yes*...
  • Page 160 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-60 Table 2–6. Continued Program Restore on Version Backup from 1.0 2.0/2.1 4.1/4.2 5.0 2.16 3.18 yes* yes* 4.15 yes* yes* yes* 4.25...
  • Page 161 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-61 NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: The default barrier code and any programmed barrier codes from Release 2.1 and earlier are carried over to Release 3.0 and later with no change and the barrier code length is four (4).
  • Page 162 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-62 Insert the forced installation memory card into the PCMCIA interface slot on the !  processor module. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: Using the forced installation memory card will cause a frigid start.
  • Page 163 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-63 Table 2–10. Lists the features added with Release 3.1 of the communications system. — When you upgrade from Release 3.0 to Release 3.1, you must program these features as the last step of the upgrade procedure.
  • Page 164 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-64 — When you upgrade from Release 3.0 to Release 4.1, you must program the features listed in Table 2–10, then the features listed in Table 2–11, then the features listed in Table...
  • Page 165 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-65 — When you upgrade from Release 1.0 to Release 4.2, you must first program the features listed in Table 2–7, then you must program the features listed in Table...
  • Page 166 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-66 Table 2–15. Lists the features added with Release 6.0 of the communications system. — When you upgrade from Release 5.0 to Release 6.0, you must program the features listed in Table 2–15.

  • Page 167: Programming Needed After Upgrade To Release 1.1

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-67 Table 2–7. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 1.1 Feature Sequence System language More Extension language More SMDR language More Printer language More...

  • Page 168: Programming Needed After Upgrade To Release 2.0

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-68 Table 2–8. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 2.0 Feature Sequence Primary Rate Interface (PRI) DID Emulation on T1 More Night Service Calling Group...

  • Page 169: Programming Needed After Upgrade To Release 3.1

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-69 Table 2–9. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 3.0 Feature Sequence Automatic Backup Incoming Call Line More Drop Dial Identification Delay trunk no.

  • Page 170: Programming Needed After Upgrade To Release 4.0

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-70 Table 2–11. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 4.0 Feature Sequence Delayed Call More Dial ext. no. Forwarding Dial no. of delay rings Group Calling More Dial...

  • Page 171: Programming Needed After Upgrade To Release 4.1

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-71 Table 2–12. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 4.1 Feature Sequence Group Coverage Ring More More Delay sender’s extension number of rings Primary Cover Ring...
  • Page 172 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-72 Table 2–12. Continued Feature Sequence Switched 56 Data To select T1 All Tie: Switched 56 Data: Dial slot no. Dial channel no.

  • Page 173: Programming Needed After Upgrade To Release 4.2

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-73 Table 2–13. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 4.2 Feature Sequence SMDR Talk Time PRI Switch Types To select the Nortel DMS-250 for MCI services: Dial slot no.

  • Page 174: Programming Needed After Upgrade To Release 5.0

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-74 Table 2–13. Continued Feature Sequence PRI Call-by-Call To select MCI Toll Call-by-Call Services for a Services Table DMS-250 or DEX600E switch type: List To specify local exchange carrier Dial Plan Routing services for a DMS-100 switch type:...
  • Page 175 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-75 Table 2–14. Continued Feature Sequence Calling Group Alarm More Thresholds Dial calling group ext. no. Drop Dial no. of calls HotLine More More...

  • Page 176: Programming Needed After Upgrade To Release 6.0

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-76 Table 2–15. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 6.0 Feature Sequence UDP Routing Patterns Enter Pattern Number (1-20) Enter Route Number (1-4) Enter pool dialout code Enter Pattern Number (1-20)

  • Page 177: Surrogate Mode Programming

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Surrogate Mode Programming Page 2-77 Surrogate Mode Programming Surrogate mode allows qualified service personnel to perform system programming at an off-site service location. The actual communications system hardware does not have to be installed—the programmer needs only a direct connection from the PC to the processor module.
  • Page 178 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming with SPM Surrogate Mode Programming Page 2-78...

  • Page 179: Common Administrative Procedures

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Page 3-1 Common Administrative Procedures This chapter contains procedures for all of the common administrative tasks performed by the system manager in response to changes in business requirements.
  • Page 180 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Page 3-2 Telephone Line Button Assignments and Optional Telephone Fea- tures. Use these procedures to assign outside lines/trunks to the buttons on a telephone, to copy these line/trunk assignments to additional tele- phones, and to assign System Access or Intercom buttons.

  • Page 181: System Programming

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-3 Basic System Operating Conditions The procedures in this section are all related to the system rather than to the operation of extensions, operator positions, lines, or trunks.

  • Page 182: Basic System Operating Conditions

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-4 Factory Setting First extension jack on the first MLX module (also set as an operator position) Valid Entries Extension number of one of the first five extension jacks on the first MLX module Inspect...
  • Page 183 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-5 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the new extension. !  Ã SP: “Entering an Extension” Save your entry. !  Select Return to the System Programming menu.
  • Page 184 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-6 Console Procedure More Select a  È Ã Å language PC Procedure Select a language Procedure: System Language Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu.
  • Page 185 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-7 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select a system language. (The default is English.) Ã !  Ä (QJOLVK Select Å...
  • Page 186 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-8 Planning Form Form 1, System Planning Factory Setting 01-01-00 Valid Entries Month: 01 to 12 Day: 01 to 31 Year: 00 to 99 Inspect Copy Option...
  • Page 187 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-9 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter six digits for the current date. !  Ã Dial or type [ mmddyy ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 188 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-10 Valid Entries 0000 to 2359 Inspect Copy Option à  U  Ç 6\VWHP 7LPH (QWHU ([LW Console Procedure Drop Dial current time PC Procedure...

  • Page 189: System Renumbering

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-11 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter four digits for the current time. !  Ã Dial or type [ hhmm ]. Use 24-hour (military) notation (for example, enter 11:30 p.m.

  • Page 190: 2-Digit Numbering

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-12 Use the single renumbering procedure any time the extension numbers you are changing from or to are not sequential. Block renumbering is quicker, but you can use block renumbering only when the extension numbers you are changing from and to are sequential.

  • Page 191: 3-Digit Numbering

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-13 Operator Console (not flexible) 0 Extensions 100 199 Extensions 200 299 MFMs/Terminal Adapters 300–399 MFMs/Terminal Adapters 400 499 500 599 600 699 Main Pool Calling Groups...
  • Page 192 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-14 Single Renumbering Use this procedure to assign a specified extension number to a telephone, accessory, line, pool (Hybrid/PBX only), calling group, paging group, or Listed Directory Number.
  • Page 193 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-15 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Single renumbering. !  If you get the System Busy message, wait for an idle condition or exit system programming and try again later.
  • Page 194 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-16 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the new extension. !  YYYY Ã **** = item selected in Step 4 xxxx = extension entered in Step 5 Ã...
  • Page 195 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-17 Planning Form Form 2a, System Numbering: Extension Jacks Form 2b, System Numbering: Digital Adjuncts Form 2d, System Numbering: Special Renumbers Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries...
  • Page 196 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-18 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the type of group to renumber. !  Ã Ä Select /LQHV , Å ([WHQVLRQV , or $GMXQFWV .
  • Page 197 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-19 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the new extension number. !  OOOO nnnn = number entered in Step 6 Ã = option name selected in Step 3 %DFNVSDFH Ã...
  • Page 198 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-20 network UDP calls. Therefore, these techniques should not be used except in special cases for non-local private network UDP calls. Deleting and prepending digits are very useful methods and are easily set up for routing non-local dial plan calls over the PSTN, if necessary.
  • Page 199 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-21 Enter the last four digits and use UDP routing to prepend the first digit in the DEFINITY extension number. The local system recognizes the number range using the last four digits.
  • Page 200 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-22 Console Procedure Dial no. of first extension in range Dial no. of last extension in range Dial no. of pattern for extension range Ä...
  • Page 201 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-23 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the number for the last extension in the range. It must be equal to or !  higher than the starting number.
  • Page 202 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-24 Deleting Extension Ranges This procedure deletes the numbering for specified extension ranges of a non- local system and can be used, for example, to prepare for renumbering local or remote system extensions.
  • Page 203 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-25 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Non-local renumbering. !  Æ Dial or type the first number in the range of extensions to delete. !  If the number conflicts with an existing number on the local system or is not the...

  • Page 204: System Operator Positions

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Operator Positions Page 3-26 System Operator Positions Use the following procedures either to add an operator position or to change an existing operator position. The Queued Call Console (QCC) operator position is available only for Hybrid/ PBX systems.
  • Page 205 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Operator Positions Page 3-27 Primary Operator Positions The primary operator position is the extension to which your call is directed when 0 is dialed on a System Access button. The first extension jack on the first MLX module in your system is assigned as the primary operator position.
  • Page 206 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Operator Positions Page 3-28 Valid Entries First or fifth extension jack on MLX module (maximum: two per module; four QCCs per system) Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure Pƒr…h‡‚…...
  • Page 207 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Operator Positions Page 3-29 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify the QCC extension as a QCC position. !  Ã If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension”...
  • Page 208 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Operator Positions Page 3-30 Summary: Identify or Remove DLC Operator Positions Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition System idle Planning Form Form 2a, System Numbering: Extension Jacks Factory Setting Type: DLC Valid Entries...
  • Page 209 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Operator Positions Page 3-31 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Direct-Line Console (DLC). !  If you get the System Busy message, wait for an idle condition or exit system programming and try again later.

  • Page 210: Optional Operator Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Operator Features Page 3-32 Optional Operator Features The procedures in this section affect feature programming for both DLC and QCC operator positions and include the following: Operator Hold Timer DLC Operator Automatic Hold QCC operator features are covered in the next section.
  • Page 211 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Operator Features Page 3-33 Procedure: Operator Hold Timer Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Operator menu. !  Å Select Hold Timer. !  Å...
  • Page 212 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Operator Features Page 3-34 DLC Operator Automatic Hold Use this procedure to enable or disable the DLC Operator Automatic Hold feature for DLC operator positions. When this feature is enabled, it prevents accidental call disconnection.

  • Page 213: Qcc Optional Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-35 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify whether to enable or disable automatic hold. !  Ã Ä Select 6ˆ‡‚ÃC‚yqÃ@hiyr or 6ˆ‡‚ÃC‚yqÃ9v†hiyr .
  • Page 214 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-36 Hold Return Use this procedure to determine whether calls on hold are returned to the QCC queue or remain on hold, on the QCC operator console, after the hold timer has expired twice.
  • Page 215 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-37 Procedure: Hold Return Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Operator menu. !  Å Select Queued Call. !  Ä...
  • Page 216 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-38 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Return to the System Programming menu. ÇÇ !  Select @‘v‡ twice. Automatic Hold or Release Use this procedure to specify whether a call in progress (on a Call button) is automatically put on hold (Automatic Hold) or disconnected (Automatic Release) when the operator presses another button.
  • Page 217 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-39 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Queued Call. !  Ä Select Hold Release. !  Ä Specify whether in-progress calls are automatically put on hold or !  disconnected when another Call button is pressed.
  • Page 218 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-40 Queue over Threshold Use this procedure to specify the maximum number of calls (threshold) in the QCC queue before system operators are notified with a tone that the threshold has been reached or exceeded.
  • Page 219 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-41 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Threshold. !  Å Erase the current threshold ( xx ) . !  Press Drop.
  • Page 220 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-42 Elevate Priority Use this procedure to specify the length of time before calls waiting in the QCC queue are automatically reprioritized to a higher level. If priority is set to 0, calls are not prioritized.
  • Page 221 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-43 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Queued Call. !  Ä Select Elevate Priority. !  Æ Erase the current call priority ( xx ) . !  %DFNVSDFH ([LW...
  • Page 222 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-44 Calls-In-Queue Alert Use this procedure to specify whether each QCC operator is notified (with a single beep) when a new call enters the QCC queue. Summary: Calls-In-Queue Alert Programmable by System Manager...
  • Page 223 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-45 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Queued Call. !  Ä Select In-Queue Alert. !  È Enter the QCC extension to receive the calls-in-queue alert. !  If no DSS is attached: Ã...
  • Page 224 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-46 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select to program the next QCC position. The next QCC operator is displayed on Line 1. Return to the System Programming menu.
  • Page 225 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-47 4. Programming an operator position to receive DID calls to invalid destinations does not cause the calls to ring into the QCC queue unless you program such calls to be sent to a backup extension.
  • Page 226 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-48 Procedure: QCC Operator to Receive Call Types Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Operator menu. !  Å Select Queued Call. !  Ä...
  • Page 227 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-49 Group Coverage Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Operator. !  = option name selected in Step 4 Ä...
  • Page 228 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-50 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Assign or remove the operator from Group Coverage calls. !  Select You may continue to assign or remove QCC operators from Group Coverage calls by repeating Steps 4 and 5.
  • Page 229 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-51 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify the operator position. !  = option name selected in Step 4 Ã If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension”...
  • Page 230 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-52 individual lines or trunks to ring into the queue. See “QCC Queue Priority Level” on page 54. Summary: Call Type Queue Priority Level Programmable by System Manager Mode...
  • Page 231 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-53 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Call Types. !  É Select a call type. !  If you select go to Step 8.
  • Page 232 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-54 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current priority level ( x ). !  = option name selected in Step 4 Press Drop.
  • Page 233 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-55 Planning Form Form 6a, Optional Operator Features Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries QCC extension numbers Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure Dial ext.
  • Page 234 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-56 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify the QCC operator extension. !  Ã If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required.
  • Page 235 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-57 Planning Form Form 6a, Optional Operator Features Factory Setting Automatic Extended Completion Valid Entries Automatic, Manual Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure Å...
  • Page 236 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-58 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify automatic call extension or require the operator !  to extend calls manually. Ã Ä...
  • Page 237 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-59 Console Procedure Drop Å Ä  U Dial no. of rings  Ç Ç PC Procedure Type no. of rings Procedure: Return Ring Console Display/Instructions Additional Information...
  • Page 238 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-60 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the number of rings before the directed call returns !  to the QCC queue ( nn = 1 to 15). Ã...
  • Page 239 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-61 Procedure: Position Busy Backup Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Operator menu. !  Å Select Queued Call. !  Ä...
  • Page 240 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-62 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current QCC operator backup number ( xxxx ). !  YYYY 9ryr‡r 7hpx†ƒhpr @‘v‡...
  • Page 241 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-63 Summary: Voice Announce Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 6a, Optional Operator Features Factory Setting Disabled Valid Entries...
  • Page 242 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-64 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the Queued Call Operator menu. !  Press More. Select Voice Announce.

  • Page 243: Extensions

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-65 Extensions This section contains the following procedures: Assigning outside lines or trunks to the buttons on a telephone (including lines and trunks used for loudspeaker paging) Copying line button assignments from one extension to an individual extension or block of extensions Assigning the following buttons on telephones (for Hybrid/PBX systems...
  • Page 244 (such as the American Society of Composers, Artists, and Producers or Broadcast Music Incorporated). Magic on Hold requires no such license and can be purchased from Lucent Technologies. Pool buttons cannot be assigned to or removed from extensions unless the pool has trunks assigned.
  • Page 245 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-67 Summary: Assign Trunks or Pools to Extensions Programmable by System Manager Mode All, but note differences in factory settings. Idle Condition Extension idle Planning Form Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone...

  • Page 246: Extensions

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-68 Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk: Dial ext. no. Dial line/trunk no. To program a block of lines/trunks: Dial ext. no. Select trunk range Toggle LED On/Off È...
  • Page 247 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-69 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify the extension. !  Ã If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required.
  • Page 248 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-70 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Assign or remove the specified line/trunk number. !  Select You may continue to assign or remove lines/ trunks by repeating Steps 2 and 3.
  • Page 249 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-71 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Return to the System Programming menu. ÇÇ !  Select two times. Copy Line/Trunk Assignments Use this procedure to copy outside line/trunk button assignments, pool dial-out code restrictions (Hybrid/PBX only), and (for operator positions only) Night Service information from one extension to another extension or block of extensions with identical requirements.
  • Page 250 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-72 Console Procedure To copy to a single extension: Dial copy from ext. Dial copy to ext. no. To copy to a block of extensions: Dial copy from ext.
  • Page 251 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-73 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Copy the line assignments to individual !  extensions or to a block of extensions. Ä To copy to a block of extensions, they must be connected to sequentially numbered extension jacks (for example, logical IDs 11, 12, 13 and so on).
  • Page 252 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-74 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Continue to copy line assignments or go to Step 5. !  (QWHU Select , you may continue to copy After selecting line assignments from the extension currently...
  • Page 253 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-75 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the logical ID of the first extension number in the block to be copied to. !  8‚ƒ’Ãr‘‡r†v‚ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃYYYY xxxx = extension entered in Step 4 of the @‡r…Ƈh…‡vtÃr‘‡r†v‚...
  • Page 254 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-76 In Hybrid/PBX mode only, use this procedure to assign or change assignments for System Access (SA) buttons used to make or receive inside and outside calls. This procedure includes the following types of System Access buttons: Ring Voice...
  • Page 255 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-77 Release 3.0 and later Each System Access Ring or Voice on an individual telephone can be assigned as a Shared System Access (SSA) button on up to 27 other telephones.
  • Page 256 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-78 Two System Access Ring buttons and a System Access Originate Only Ring button are assigned to tip/ring equipment (for example, single-line telephones or fax machines connected to an 012 module).
  • Page 257 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-79 Procedure: Assign Intercom or System Access Buttons Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu. !  Press More.

  • Page 258: Programming Codes For Assigning Buttons

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-80 Table 3–2 provides the programming codes for assigning Ring and Voice buttons. You can handle errors in data entry as follows: If you enter a feature code incorrectly while programming, the display shows the Q…‚t…h€€vtÃ@……‚…...
  • Page 259 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-81 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify an extension. !  à SP: “Entering an Extension” Save your entry. !  Select @‡r… . Select Start.
  • Page 260 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-82 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the programming code for voice or ring button. !  =contents of button selected in Step 5 (Voice, Ring, or blank) Ã...
  • Page 261 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-83 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Enter the extension to copy to. !  YYYY xxxx = extension entered in Step 1 Ã...
  • Page 262 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-84 Analog Multiline Telephone without Built-in Speakerphone (BIS) or Hands Free Answer Intercom (HFAI) Capability Use this procedure to identify analog multiline telephones with flat membrane buttons that do not have BIS or HFAI capability.
  • Page 263 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-85 Procedure: Analog Multiline Telephones without BIS or HFAI Capability Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. !  È Select BIS/HFAI. !  Specify the extension.
  • Page 264 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-86 Analog Multiline Telephones with Voice Announce to Busy Use this procedure to dedicate a voice or voice pair to be used to provide the Voice Announce to Busy feature on an analog multiline telephone.
  • Page 265 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-87 Procedure: Analog Multiline Telephones with Voice Announce to Busy Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. !  È Select Voice Signal. !  Specify the first extension (odd numbered) of the pair.
  • Page 266 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-88 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify whether or not the extension is paired for Voice Announce to Busy. !  Select You may continue to assign or remove the Voice Announce to Busy feature to additional extensions by repeating Steps 3 and 4.
  • Page 267 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-89 Summary: Fax Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone Form 4d, MLX Telephone Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog...
  • Page 268 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-90 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Fax. !  Å Select Extension. !  Ã Specify the extension to be used for the fax machine. !  Ã...
  • Page 269 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-91 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Message Waiting. !  Ä Enter the extension for the fax machine that is to send !  the message-waiting indication.
  • Page 270 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-92 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Assign or remove the extension to receive the message-waiting indication. !  Select You may continue to assign or remove message- waiting indication to additional extensions by repeating Steps 10 and 11.

  • Page 271: Optional Extension Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-93 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Return to the System Programming menu. ÇÇ !  Select twice.
  • Page 272 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-94 Extension Language Use this procedure to change the language for an MLX telephone. It applies to Releases 1.1 and later only. Summary: Extension Language Programmable by Users and system manager...
  • Page 273 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-95 Procedure: Extension Language Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu. !  Select More.
  • Page 274 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-96 Single Extension Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the extension number. !  Ã If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension”...
  • Page 275 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-97 Block Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the starting extension number. !  @‘‡r†v‚ÃGhtˆhtr) @‡r…Ƈh…‡vtÃr‘‡r†v‚ 7hpx†ƒhpr à @‘v‡ @‡r… SP: “Entering an Extension”...
  • Page 276 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-98 Pool Dial-Out Code Use this procedure to allow or restrict dialing pool dial-out codes and the placing of calls on specific line/trunk pools. Beginning with Release 3.1, the default settings restrict all extensions from dialing any line/trunk pool dial-out code.
  • Page 277 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-99 Procedure: Pool Dial-Out Code Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. !  È Select Dial-Out Code. !  Å...
  • Page 278 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-100 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the pool dial-out code. !  YYYY xxxx = extension entered in Step 3 Ã...
  • Page 279 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-101 Calling Restrictions Use this procedure to change individual extension calling restrictions to one of the following: Unrestricted Restricted from making all outgoing calls Restricted from making toll calls SECURITY ALERT Toll fraud can occur if extensions are not properly restricted.
  • Page 280 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-102 Procedure: Calling Restrictions Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. !  È Select Restrictions. !  Æ Specify the extension.
  • Page 281 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-103 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the appropriate restriction. !  YYYY xxxx = number entered in Step 3 Ã Ä...
  • Page 282 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-104 If you are copying restrictions to a block of extensions, they must be sequentially numbered. The extensions you are copying to and from can be both operator and nonoperator positions.
  • Page 283 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-105 Procedure: Copy Calling Restrictions Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. !  È Select Restrict Copy. !  È...
  • Page 284 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-106 Single Extension Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify the extension from which you want to copy calling restrictions. !  Ã...
  • Page 285 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-107 Block Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify the extension from which you want to copy calling restrictions. !  Sr†‡…vp‡v‚Ã8‚ƒ’) @‡r…Ãr‘‡r†v‚Ã‡‚Ãp‚ƒ’...
  • Page 286 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-108 ARS Restriction Level For Extensions Use this procedure to assign an ARS restriction level to an extension. Outgoing calls can be made only to routes that have a Facility Restriction Level (FRL) lower than or equal to that of the extension for which the call is being made.
  • Page 287 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-109 Procedure: Assigning ARS Restriction Level For an Extension Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. !  È Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu.
  • Page 288 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-110 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current Restriction Level (x). !  @‘‡r†v‚ÃYYYY xxxx = extension entered in Step 4 Press Drop.
  • Page 289 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-111 Forced Account Code Entry Use this procedure to assign or remove Forced Account Code Entry. When this feature is programmed on individual extensions, the user must enter a 1- to 16-digit account code before making an outside call.
  • Page 290 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-112 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Forced Account Code Entry. !  É Specify the extension. !  Ã If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension”...
  • Page 291 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-113 Microphone Operation Use this procedure to enable or disable microphones on MLX telephones (except QCC operator positions). When the microphone is disabled, users cannot use the speakerphone to conduct conversations.
  • Page 292 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-114 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. !  Press More. Select Microphone Disable. !  É...
  • Page 293 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-115 Authorization Codes The Authorization Code feature allows you to pick up someone else’s telephone, enter your authorization code, and complete a call with the restrictions that apply to your own telephone ( home extension ) .
  • Page 294 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-116 Procedure: Authorization Codes Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. !  È Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. !  Press More.
  • Page 295 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-117 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current authorization code ( xxxxxxxxxxx ). !  YYYY xxxx = extension entered in Step 4 YYYYYYYYYYY Press Drop.
  • Page 296 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-118 Remote Call Forwarding Use this procedure to allow or disallow the Remote Call Forwarding capability, which permits users to forward calls to an outside number. In Release 6.0 and later systems, Remote Call Forwarding must be enabled in order for an extension user to activate Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding.
  • Page 297 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-119 Console Procedure More Toggle LED On/Off or È   Dial ext. no.  Ç Ç PC Procedure Toggle letter On/Off or type ext.
  • Page 298 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-120 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the extension. !  Ã If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required.
  • Page 299 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-121 Summary: Delayed Call Forwarding Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone Form 4d, MLX Telephone Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment...
  • Page 300 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-122 Procedure: Delayed Call Forwarding Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. !  ÃÃÃ È Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. !  Press More.
  • Page 301 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-123 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current number of delay rings (x). !  @‘‡r†v‚ÃYYYY xxxx = extension entered in Step 4 Æ...
  • Page 302 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-124 Summary: Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone Form 4d, MLX Telephone Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment...
  • Page 303 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-125 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Go to the third screen of the Extensions menu. !  Press More twice. Select Trunk to Trunk Transfer. !  Ã...
  • Page 304 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-126 Primary Cover Ring Delay The Primary Cover Ring Delay option replaces the Delay Ring Interval programmed on a systemwide basis in releases prior to Release 4.1. Use this procedure to specify the following: The delay before a Primary Cover button programmed for Delay Ring begins to ring audibly...
  • Page 305 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-127 Procedure: Primary Cover Ring Delay Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. !  È Go to the third screen of the Extensions menu. !  Press More twice.
  • Page 306 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-128 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify the sender’s extension. !  If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required.
  • Page 307 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-129 Secondary Cover Ring Delay The Secondary Cover Ring Delay option replaces the Delay Ring Interval programmed on a systemwide basis in releases prior to Release 4.1. Use this procedure to specify the delay in addition to the fixed Secondary Coverage Delay Interval (two rings) before a Secondary Cover button programmed for Delay Ring begins to ring audibly.
  • Page 308 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-130 Procedure: Secondary Cover Ring Delay Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. !  È Go to the third screen of the Extensions menu. !  Press More twice.
  • Page 309 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-131 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify the sender’s extension. !  If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required.
  • Page 310 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-132 Group Coverage Ring Delay The Group Cover Ring Delay option replaces the Delay Ring Interval programmed on a systemwide basis in releases prior to Release 4.1. Use this procedure to specify the following: The number of rings before sending calls to Group Coverage when the sender does not have Primary or Secondary Coverage or the receivers are...
  • Page 311 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-133 Procedure: Group Coverage Ring Delay Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. !  È Go to the third screen of the Extensions menu. !  Press More twice.
  • Page 312 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-134 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the sender’s extension. !  If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required.
  • Page 313 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-135 HotLine Use this procedure to enable or disable the HotLine feature on a single-line telephone set or device. Summary: HotLine Programmable by System Manager Mode...
  • Page 314 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-136 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select HotLine. !  Å Specify the extension. !  Ã If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension”...
  • Page 315 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-137 Display Preference In Release 6.0 and later systems, use this procedure to specify display preferences for incoming inside calls or non-local dial plan calls that arrive on PRI tandem trunks.
  • Page 316 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-138 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Go to the third screen of the Extensions menu. !  Press More twice. Select Display Preference. !  Æ...
  • Page 317 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-139 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select If you select to assign a display preference to the next extension in a sequence, repeat Step 5.

  • Page 318: Optional Group Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-140 Optional Group Features The procedures in this section describe how to program the following optional features: Pickup Groups Group Paging Group Coverage Member Assignments Group Coverage Delay Interval (Release 4.0 and earlier) Group Calling Member Assignments...
  • Page 319 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-141 Procedure: Pickup Groups Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. !  È Select Call Pickup. !  Enter the number of the pickup group ( nn = 1 to 30).
  • Page 320 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-142 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the extension. !  xx = number entered in Step 3 If no DSS is attached: Ã...
  • Page 321 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-143 Summary: Group Paging Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 7b, Group Paging Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries Extension number...
  • Page 322 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-144 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Group Page. !  Ä Enter the extension number of the paging group. !  “System Renumbering”...
  • Page 323 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-145 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Continue to assign the extension to another paging group !  or go to Step 9. Select Return to Step 6 to continue programming.
  • Page 324 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-146 Summary: Group Coverage Member Assignments Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 7c, Group Coverage Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries...
  • Page 325 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-147 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Group Coverage. !  Å Enter the number of the coverage group ( nn = 1 to 30). !  Ã...
  • Page 326 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-148 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Continue to assign the extension to another coverage group or go to Step 9. !  Select Return to Step 6 to continue programming.
  • Page 327 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-149 Procedure: Group Coverage Delay Interval Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the Options menu. !  É Go to the second screen of the Options menu. !  Press More.
  • Page 328 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-150 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Ç Return to the System Programming menu. !  Select Group Calling Member Assignments Use this procedure to assign or remove an extension to or from a calling group.
  • Page 329 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-151 Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure More Dial calling group ext. no. Dial ext. no. È  Æ   Ç Ç Ç PC Procedure Type calling group ext.
  • Page 330 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-152 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Members. !  Enter the extension number of the calling group. !  “System Renumbering” on page 4–14 for the factory setting for extension numbers assigned to calling groups.
  • Page 331 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-153 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Continue to assign the extension to another calling group or go to Step 10. !  Select Return to Step 7 to continue programming.
  • Page 332 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-154 Procedure: Group Calling Line/Trunk or Pool Assignments Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. !  È Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. !  Press More.
  • Page 333 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-155 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the extension of the calling group. !  Ã Dial or type [ nnnn ] . Save your entry.

  • Page 334: Optional Group Calling Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-156 Optional Group Calling Features This section includes programming procedures for the following optional group calling features: Hunt Type Group Calling Delay Announcements Group Calling Announcement Interval Group Calling Repeat Announcement...
  • Page 335 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-157 Valid Entries Circular, Linear, Most Idle Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure More Dial calling group ext. no. , or È...
  • Page 336 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-158 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Hunt Type. !  Ã Enter the extension number of the calling group. !  Ã...
  • Page 337 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-159 Group Calling Delay Announcements Use this procedure to designate the announcement devices used to play messages to callers while they are waiting in the queue. As of Release 5.0, 10 primary and one secondary announcement devices can be designated for each calling group;...
  • Page 338 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-160 Procedure: Group Calling Delay Announcements Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. !  È Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. !  Press More.
  • Page 339 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-161 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the extension number of the calling group. !  OOOO Ã SP: “Enter an extension.” Save your entry.
  • Page 340 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-162 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Continue to assign the delay announcement device extension !  to another calling group or go to Step 11. Select Return to Step 7 to continue programming.
  • Page 341 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-163 Procedure: Group Calling Announcement Interval Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. !  È Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. !  Press More.
  • Page 342 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-164 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the extension number of the calling group. !  OOOO Ã SP: ‘Enter an extension.” Save your entry.
  • Page 343 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-165 Group Calling Repeat Announcement Use this procedure to set the secondary announcement to repeat after the Announcement Interval. Summary: Group Calling Repeat Announcement Programmable by System Manager...
  • Page 344 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-166 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. !  Press More. Select Group Calling. !  Æ...
  • Page 345 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-167 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Repeat announcement. !  B…‚ˆƒÃ8hyyvtÃYYYY Æ Enter the Yes or No. !  YYYY xxxx =calling group ext.
  • Page 346 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-168 Summary: Group Coverage Receiver Programmable by System Manager, Integrated Administration Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 7c, Group Coverage Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries...
  • Page 347 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-169 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Group Calling. !  Æ Select Group Coverage. !  Å Enter the extension number of the calling group. !  Ã...
  • Page 348 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-170 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Assign or remove the coverage group as the receiver for the calling group. !  (QWHU Select You may continue to assign or remove additional...
  • Page 349 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-171 Overflow coverage can be provided only by calling groups or the QCC queue (Hybrid/PBX only), not by individual extensions. A calling group or the QCC queue (Hybrid/PBX only) can provide overflow coverage for more than one calling group;...
  • Page 350 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-172 Procedure: Group Calling Overflow and Thresholds Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. !  ÃÃ È Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu.
  • Page 351 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-173 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the extension of the calling group. !  Ã Dial or type [ nnnn ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 352 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-174 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Assign or remove the group or directory as overflow backup coverage. !  (QWHU Select 'HOHWH You may continue to assign or remove additional...
  • Page 353 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-175 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Time Based Overflow. !  B…‚ˆƒÃ8hyyvtÃYYYY xxxx = number entered in Step 5 Ä...
  • Page 354 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-176 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select to return to Step 10 or to return to Step 8. You may change the overflow receiver by repeating Steps 7 and 8.
  • Page 355 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-177 Procedure: Group Calling Message-Waiting Indicator Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. !  È Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. !  Press More.
  • Page 356 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-178 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the extension of the calling group. !  Ã Dial or type [ nnnn ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 357 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-179 Group Calling Calls-In-Queue Alarm Thresholds Use this procedure to specify the number of calls that wait in the calling group queue before group members are notified with either an external alert (an external alert is turned on when the third threshold is met) or a light on the telephone.
  • Page 358 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-180 Procedure: Group Calling Calls-In-Queue Alarm Thresholds Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. !  È Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. !  Press More.
  • Page 359 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-181 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the extension of the calling group. !  Ã Dial or type [ nnnn ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 360 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-182 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Return to the System Programming menu. ÇÇ !  Select @‘v‡ twice. Group Calling External Alert for Calls-In-Queue Alarm Use this procedure to designate the external alert device used to notify calling group members when the number of calls in the queue reaches the programmed...
  • Page 361 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-183 Procedure: Group Calling External Alert for Calls-In-Queue Alarm Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. !  È...
  • Page 362 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-184 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the extension of the calling group. !  B…‚ˆƒÃ8hyyvt) @‡r…Ãr‘‡r†v‚Ãˆ€ir… ‚sÃt…‚ˆƒ 7hpx†ƒhpr à @‘v‡...
  • Page 363 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-185 Group Type Use this procedure to determine whether or not the system automatically logs in members of a calling group after a power failure. This setting also determines the type of voice messaging interface when the calling group is used to connect voice messaging or automated attendant applications.
  • Page 364 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-186 Summary: Group Type Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 7d, Group Calling Factory Setting Automatic Log Out Valid Entries...
  • Page 365 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-187 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Group Calling. !  Æ Go to the second screen of the Group Calling menu. !  Press More.
  • Page 366 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-188 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the type of login for the group that occurs after a power failure. !  YYYY xxxx = number entered in Step 6...
  • Page 367 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-189 Remote-access calls to a calling group, coverage calls directed to a calling group, and all outside/CO calls are not eligible for queue control. Queue control does not apply to calls received directly on any of the following facilities: Loop-start lines...
  • Page 368 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-190 Procedure: Queue Control Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. !  È Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. !  Press More.
  • Page 369 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-191 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Queue Control. !  Ä Enter the extension number of the group. !  Ã...

  • Page 370: System Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-192 System Features This section contains programming instructions for the optional system features that affect all or most system users and includes the following: Transfer Return Time One-Touch Transfer/Hold Transfer Audible...
  • Page 371 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-193 Transfer Return Time Use this procedure to specify the number of times the telephone rings before a call transferred to another inside telephone is returned to the originator. A setting of 0 means that transferred calls are never returned to the originator.
  • Page 372 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-194 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Transfer. !  Ã Select Return Time. !  Ã Erase the current number of rings ( x ). !  Press Drop.
  • Page 373 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-195 One-Touch Transfer/One-Touch Hold Use this procedure to assign the One-Touch Transfer or One-Touch Hold feature. One-Touch Transfer allows users to initiate transfers to another extension by pressing an Auto Dial or DSS button for that extension.
  • Page 374 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-196 Procedure: One-Touch Transfer/Hold Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Options menu. !  É Select Transfer. !  Ã Select One Touch. !  Ä...
  • Page 375 Composers, Artists, and Producers or Broadcast Music Incorporated). Magic on Hold requires no such license and can be purchased from Lucent Technologies. 2. In Release 6.0 and later systems, when extensions are programmed to use the Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding feature, do not program Music On Hold as the transfer audible.
  • Page 376 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-198 Summary: Transfer Audible Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 8a, System Features Factory Setting Music on Hold Valid Entries Music on Hold, Ringback...
  • Page 377 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-199 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Transfer Audible. !  Å Specify whether the outside caller hears music or !  ringing while being transferred.
  • Page 378 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-200 Valid Entries Voice Announce, Ring Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure É Ã Æ Ã Ä  Ç Ç PC Procedure Procedure: Type of Transfer Console Display/Instructions Additional Information...
  • Page 379 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-201 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify whether a voice or ring button is automatically selected. !  Ã Ä Select Save your entry. !  Select Return to the System Programming menu.
  • Page 380 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-202 Procedure: Camp-On Return Time Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Options menu. !  É Select Camp-On. !  Ä Erase the current number of seconds ( xxx ).
  • Page 381 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-203 Call Park Return Time Use this procedure to specify the number of seconds before a call put on hold with the Park feature is returned to the originator.
  • Page 382 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-204 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current number of seconds ( xxx ). !  %DFNVSDFH ([LW (QWHU Press Drop. Enter the number of seconds before a parked call returns to the originator !  ( nnn = 30 to 300).
  • Page 383 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-205 Console Procedure Pƒ‡v‚† 9ryh’ÃSvt Drop Dial no. of rings É Æ U  Ç @‡r… @‘v‡ PC Procedure Type no. of rings Procedure: Delay Ring Interval Console Display/Instructions Additional Information...
  • Page 384 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-206 Automatic Callback Interval Use this procedure to specify the number of times the telephone rings at the originator’s telephone before the system cancels a Callback request. Summary: Automatic Callback Interval Programmable by System Manager...
  • Page 385 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-207 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Automatic Callback Interval. !  È Erase the current number of rings ( x ). !  %DFNVSDFH ([LW...
  • Page 386 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-208 Extension Status Use this procedure to specify whether the Extension Status (ES) feature is used in Hotel mode or Group Calling/Call Management System (CMS) mode. The calling mode affects the meaning of the LEDs and the use of Auto Dial or DSS buttons when the DLC operator position is in Extension Status mode.
  • Page 387 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-209 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Extension Status. !  É Specify the extension status mode. !  Ã Ä Select Save your entry.
  • Page 388 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-210 Inspect Copy Option  È Å  Ç Console Procedure More Select language PC Procedure Select language Procedure: SMDR Language Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu.
  • Page 389 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-211 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the SMDR language. !  Ã Ä Select Å , or Save your entry. !  Select Return to the System Programming menu.
  • Page 390 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-212 Console Procedure É  Ã Ã Ä  Ç Ç PC Procedure Procedure: SMDR Call Report Format Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Options menu.
  • Page 391 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-213 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Return to the System Programming menu. ÇÇ !  Select twice.
  • Page 392 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-214 Procedure: SMDR Call Length Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Options menu. !  É Select SMDR. !  Select Call Length. !  inserts a page break in the report.
  • Page 393 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-215 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Return to the System Programming menu. ÇÇ !  Select twice.
  • Page 394 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-216 Procedure: SMDR Calls Recorded on Call Report Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Options menu. !  É Select SMDR. !  Select Call Report.
  • Page 395 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-217 SMDR Account Code Format For calls made using an authorization code, SMDR can be programmed to have either the “home extension” or the actual authorization codes recorded in the Account Code field if no Account Code is entered.
  • Page 396 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-218 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select SMDR. !  Select Authorization Code. !  inserts a page break in the report. È...
  • Page 397 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-219 SMDR Talk Time In Release 4.2 and later systems, the Talk field was added to the SMDR call record. The talk field is designed for the MERLIN LEGEND Reporter application that is used to capture detailed information on incoming and outgoing voice and data calls with a special emphasis on calling groups.
  • Page 398 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-220 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select SMDR. !  Select Talk Time. !  É Specify whether you want Talk Time enabled or disabled. !  Ã...
  • Page 399 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-221 Inside Dial Tone Use this procedure to set the inside (system) dial tone to be either different from, or the same as, the outside line/trunk dial tone. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE:...
  • Page 400 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-222 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Inside Dial Tone. !  Specify which dial tone you want for inside. !  Ã...
  • Page 401 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-223 Valid Entries 0000 to 2359 Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure To deactivate Reminder Service Cancel: Drop To set Reminder Service Cancel time: Drop Dial time É...
  • Page 402 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-224 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current reminder service time ( xxxx ) if assigned. !  Sr€vqr…ÃTr…‰vprÃ8hpry) @‡r…Ãu‚ˆ…Ã!"Ãhq €vˆ‡rÃ$( YYYY 7hpx†ƒhpr @‘v‡...
  • Page 403 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-225 Summary: Redirect Outside Calls to Unassigned Extension Numbers Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 8a, System Features Factory Setting Extension number of primary operator Valid Entries...
  • Page 404 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-226 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the Options menu. !  Press More. Select Redirect Unassigned Extension Numbers. !  Ã...
  • Page 405 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-227 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Return to the System Programming menu. Ç !  Select @‘v‡ . Extension Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify the extension to which calls are to be redirected.
  • Page 406 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-228 Host System Dial Codes for Behind Switch Mode Use this procedure to assign the host system dial codes for the Transfer, Conference, and Drop features.
  • Page 407 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-229 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the Options menu. !  Press More. Select Behind Switch. !  Ä...
  • Page 408 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-230 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Return to the System Programming menu. ÇÇ !  Select twice.
  • Page 409 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-231 Procedure: Recall Timer Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Options menu. !  É Go to the second screen of the Options menu. !  Press More.
  • Page 410 Setting interdigit timers to shorter times permits the call to be put on hold or transferred. If you are experiencing these types of problems, call the Lucent Technologies Helpline at 1 800 628-2888. Allowed Lists Use this procedure to establish Allowed Lists.
  • Page 411 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-233 Procedure: Allowed Lists Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Tables menu. !  Select Allowed List. !  Ã Enter the list ( I = 0 to 7) and entry ( e = 0 to 9) numbers. !  If you do not enter a list number, List 0 is assigned.
  • Page 412 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-234 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current area code/exchange ( nnnnnn ). !  l = list number entered in Step 3 e = entry number entered in Step 3 OOOOOO Press Drop.
  • Page 413 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-235 Console Procedure Dial list no. Dial ext. no.  Ä  Ç Ç PC Procedure Type list no. Type ext. no. Procedure: Assign Allowed Lists to Extensions Console Display/Instructions Additional Information...
  • Page 414 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-236 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the extension to assign to the allowed list. !  x = list number entered in Step 3 If no DSS is attached: Ã...
  • Page 415 1809, 1900, and 976 or 1(wildcard)976. In Release 3.1 and later systems, Disallowed List number 7 does not include 800 and 1800 and 411 and 1411, but Lucent Technologies recommends that you add them. Assign all voice mail port extensions to this Disallowed List. Lucent Technologies recommends assigning Disallowed List number 7.
  • Page 416 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-238 Procedure: Disallowed Lists Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Tables menu. !  Select Disallowed List. !  Å Specify the list ( I = 0 to 7 ) and entry ( e = 0 to 9) numbers. !  If you do not enter a list number, List 0 is assigned.
  • Page 417 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-239 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the disallowed telephone number (n = up to 12 digits). !  Ã Dial or type [ n ]. Continue to assign the next telephone number to the disallowed list or go to !  Step 8.
  • Page 418 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-240 Procedure: Assign Disallowed Lists to Extensions Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Tables menu. !  Select Disallow To Lists. !  Æ...
  • Page 419 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-241 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the extension to which you want to assign the disallowed list. !  x = list number entered in Step 3 Ã...

  • Page 420: Night Service

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Page 3-242 Night Service The procedures in this section cover how to program the following optional Night Service features: Night Service Group Assignment Night Service with Outward Restriction Night Service with Time Set Night Service with Coverage Control...
  • Page 421 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Page 3-243 Console Procedure To assign a calling group to a Night Service group: Dial ext. no. of Night Service attendant Dial calling group no. To assign an extension to a Night Service group: Dial ext.
  • Page 422 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Page 3-244 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Group Assignment. !  à Select an option. à !  Select @‘‡r†v‚† to add an extension to a Night Service group.
  • Page 423 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Page 3-245 Extensions Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the extension you want to assign to the Night Service group. !  YYYY xxxx = number entered in Step 4 Ã...
  • Page 424 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Page 3-246 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Assign or remove the calling group(s) from the Night Service group. !  YYYY xxxx = number entered in Step 4 Select to assign or remove your entry and continue adding or...
  • Page 425 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Page 3-247 Summary: Night Service with Outward Restriction Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 9b, Night Service: Outward Restrictions Factory Setting No password Valid Entries...
  • Page 426 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Page 3-248 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current password ( xxxx ) if assigned. !  YYYY Press Drop. Enter a four-digit password ( n = any combination of 0 to 9). !  To remove the password requirement, leave the screen blank and go to Step 5.
  • Page 427 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Page 3-249 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Erase the current telephone number ( n ) if assigned. !  x = list item number entered in Step 7 Press Drop.
  • Page 428 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Page 3-250 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the extension. !  Ã If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required.
  • Page 429 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Page 3-251 NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: For Release 2.1 and earlier, after setting Start and Stop time for Night Service you must use the following procedure to set the current day of the week for Night Service.
  • Page 430 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Page 3-252 Procedure: Night Service with Time Set Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Night Service menu. !  Select Night Service option. È...
  • Page 431 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Page 3-253 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  (QWHU Select Return to the System Programming menu. Ç !  ([LW Select Add or Change Stop Time Procedure...
  • Page 432 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Page 3-254 Activate/Deactivate Night Service Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Turn Night Service On or Off. Ã !  Select to turn Night Service on. Ä...
  • Page 433 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Page 3-255 Factory Setting Disabled Valid Entries Enable or Disable Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure   Ã Ä  Ç PC Procedure Procedure: Night Service with Coverage Control Console Display/Instructions Additional Information...

  • Page 434: Labeling

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 3-256 Labeling The procedures in this section cover how to add or change labels for the following: Extension Directory Lines or Trunks Posted Message Group Calling System Speed Dial Directory...
  • Page 435 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 3-257 Summary: Extension Directory Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 2a, System Numbering: Extension Jacks Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries Not applicable...
  • Page 436 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 3-258 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Directory. !  Ã Select Extension. !  Ä Specify the extension you want to label. !  Save your entry.
  • Page 437 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 3-259 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter a label for the extension. !  3XQFWXDWLRQ to toggle between letters and punctuation. Ã Dial or type the label. Save your entry.
  • Page 438 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 3-260 Procedure: Lines or Trunks Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu. !  Press More. Select the Labeling menu.
  • Page 439 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 3-261 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current label ( AAAAAAA ) if assigned. !  xxx = number entered in Step 4 $$$$$$$ Qˆp‡ˆh‡v‚...
  • Page 440 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 3-262 Summary: Posted Messages Programmable by System Manager, Integrated Administration Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 8a, Label Form: Posted Message Factory Setting First 10 messages Valid Entries...
  • Page 441 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 3-263 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Posted Message. !  Å Enter the posted message number ( nn = 1 to 20). !  Ã...
  • Page 442 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 3-264 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. È !  Select @‡r… . È NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: , not Change additional messages by repeating Steps 4 through 8.
  • Page 443 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 3-265 Procedure: Group Calling Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu. !  Press More. Select the Labeling menu.
  • Page 444 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 3-266 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current label ( AAAAAAA ) if assigned. !  B…ƒ8yÃYYYY xxxx = number entered in Step 4 $$$$$$$ Press Drop.
  • Page 445 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 3-267 System Speed Dial Directory Use this procedure to establish System Speed Dial numbers for all system users. You can also use this procedure to enter the alphanumeric labels shown on display telephones (for the System Directory feature of the MLX telephone).
  • Page 446 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 3-268 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the Labeling menu. !  Ã Select Directory. !  Ã Select System. !  Ã Enter the speed dial code number you want to add or !  change ( nnn = 600 to 729).
  • Page 447 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 3-269 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current label ( AAAAAAA ) if assigned. !  xxx = code entered in Step 4 $$$$$$$ Press Drop.
  • Page 448 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 3-270 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter a telephone number for the speed dial code !  entered in Step 5 ( n = up to 20 digits). Include any special characters shown on the planning form: Hold (A+H) = Pause...

  • Page 449: Print Reports

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Print Reports Page 3-271 Print Reports Use the procedures in this section to change the language for system reports and to print the system reports. Report Language Use this procedure to change the language of the system reports.
  • Page 450 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Print Reports Page 3-272 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Language. !  È Select Printer. !  Æ Specify a language for the reports. !  Ã...
  • Page 451 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Print Reports Page 3-273 Printing System Reports The communications system can be used to print a variety of reports. You can print individual reports or use the option to print the entire set of available reports, including all report sections and options.
  • Page 452 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Print Reports Page 3-274 Remote Access — General Options — Non-TIE Restrictions — TIE Restrictions — Barrier Code Restrictions Operator Information — Position — General Options —...
  • Page 453 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Print Reports Page 3-275 NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: If you select the option, keep in mind that the reports take several minutes to print. You may want to schedule use of the printer during off-peak hours.
  • Page 454 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Print Reports Page 3-276  Å È Ç PC Procedure To print trunk information: Select trunk type  Å    Ç To print extension information: Type extension no.
  • Page 455 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Print Reports Page 3-277 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the report you want to print. !  xxxx = previously selected language For additional selections press More. If you select go to Trunk Information Procedure.
  • Page 456 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Print Reports Page 3-278 Trunk Information Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify a trunk type. !  Ã Press the button or function key next to your selection.

  • Page 457: Memory Card

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 3-279 Memory Card A PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) interface slot is present on the processor module. The slot is a standard interface through which information can be added to or obtained from the system using a memory card.

  • Page 458: Pcmcia Memory Card

    Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 3-280 INSERT LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES PROPRIETARY THIS MEMORY CARD CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES THAT IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OR USED EXCEPT IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE AGREEMENTS. COPYRIGHT © 1993 LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Figure 3–4.

  • Page 459: Inserting The Memory Card

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 3-281 Inserting the Card To insert the card, hold the card with the Lucent logo facing up and the arrow pointing toward the slot. See Figure 3-5 for the proper way to insert the memory card into the slot on the processor module.
  • Page 460 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 3-282 Backup Use this procedure to make a copy of your customized system data. You should create a backup at least three times during system installation (so that programmed information is not lost) and once after each system upgrade, service technician visit, or major system reconfiguration.
  • Page 461 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 3-283 NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: If the system performs a System Erase (frigid start), all programming is set to the default values. If a previous backup file is available, perform a restore.
  • Page 462 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 3-284 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the System menu. !  Ã Select Back/Restore. !  Select Backup. !  Ã Select the backup filename.
  • Page 463 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 3-285 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Rename the backup file ( n = 1 to 11 characters). !  x = backup file selected in Step 5 mm/dd = current month and day 3XQFWXDWLRQ to toggle between...
  • Page 464 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 3-286 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Observe the backup completion screen. !  7hpxˆƒÃ OOOOOOOOOOO nnnnnnnnnnn = backup filename 7hpxˆƒÃTˆppr††sˆyy’ 8‚€ƒyr‡rq @‘v‡ Return to the System Programming menu.
  • Page 465 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 3-287 NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: If an automatic backup fails for any reason (except when the failure results because the memory card is write-protected) the automatic backup feature is turned off.
  • Page 466 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 3-288 Procedure: Automatic Backup Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Insert the memory card into the PCMCIA interface slot on the processor !  module.
  • Page 467 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 3-289 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  (QWHU Select If you selected you have finished this procedure. Go to Step 7. 'DLO\ If you selected go to...
  • Page 468 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 3-290 Weekly Backup Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current weekly backup day and time ( xxxxx ). !  EIINN YYYYY Press Drop.
  • Page 469 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 3-291 Backup Canceled If the system detects an error, either on the memory card or with the backup file, or if you terminate the backup, this screen appears. x = backup filename The backup file being created is deleted and the backup is terminated.
  • Page 470 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 3-292 Card Is Write-Protected The memory card is write-protected. You must remove the memory card, flip the write-protect tab, reinsert the memory card, and repeat the backup procedure. CAUTION: CAUTION: The memory card may be write-protected to avoid the accidental erasure of...

  • Page 471: Programming Procedures

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Page 4-1 Programming Procedures This chapter contains procedures for all of the advanced programming features and options available on the System Programming menu, where each of the procedures begins.

  • Page 472: Basic System Operating Conditions

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 4-2 Basic System Operating Conditions The procedures in this section are all related to the system rather than to the operation of telephones, operator positions, lines, or trunks.
  • Page 473 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 4-3 Summary: System Restart Programmable by Qualified support personnel Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Not applicable Factory Setting None Valid Entries None...

  • Page 474: Basic System Operating Conditions

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 4-4 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Respond to the query. Ã !  To restart the system select . The System Restart screen appears. Ä...
  • Page 475 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 4-5 Summary: System Programming Position Assignment Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 1, System Planning Factory Setting First extension jack on the first MLX module (also set as an operator position)
  • Page 476 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 4-6 Factory Setting English Valid Entries English, French, Spanish Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure More  È Ã Å Select a language PC Procedure Select a language Board Renumbering...
  • Page 477 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 4-7 Procedure: Board Renumbering Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the System menu. !  Ã Select Board Renumbering. !  Æ...
  • Page 478 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 4-8 Mode of Operation The system mode Key, Behind Switch, or Hybrid/PBX determines how the system operates and directly affects the following operations: How lines and/or trunks are provided to users Types of operator consoles allowed Features available...
  • Page 479 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 4-9 Ã Å Console Procedure Select mode PC Procedure Select mode Procedure: Mode of Operation Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the System menu. !  Ã...
  • Page 480 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 4-10 Automatic Maintenance Busy Automatic Maintenance Busy allows the system to take a malfunctioning trunk out of service for outgoing calls (incoming calls are never blocked). This prevents faulty outside facilities from causing disruptions in outgoing calling patterns.
  • Page 481 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 4-11 Procedure: Automatic Maintenance Busy Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the System menu. !  Ã Select Automatic Maintenance Busy. !  È...
  • Page 482 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 4-12 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the malfunctioning tie trunk service. !  If you selected and your system has tie trunks, specify whether to take malfunctioning tie trunks out of service automatically or leave malfunctioning tie Ã...
  • Page 483 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 4-13 Summary: Set System Date Programmable by. System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 1, System Planning Factory Setting 01-01-00 Valid Entries...

  • Page 484: System Renumbering

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 4-14 Valid Entries 0000 to 2359 Inspect Copy Option à  U  Ç Console Procedure Drop Dial current time PC Procedure Type current time System Renumbering The procedures in this section are used to assign the 2-digit, 3-digit, and Set Up...

  • Page 485: 2-Digit Numbering

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 4-15 In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), you may choose non-local dial plan numbering to specify the numbering of extensions connected to remote networked systems and allow users on your system to access those extensions as if they were connected to your own system.

  • Page 486: 3-Digit Numbering

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 4-16 Operator Console (not flexible) 0 Extensions 100 199 Extensions 200 299 MFMs/Terminal Adapters 300–399 MFMs/Terminal Adapters 400 499 500 599 600 699 Main Pool Calling Groups Paging...
  • Page 487 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 4-17 Select System Numbering Plan WARNING: To avoid possible loss of system programming information, renumber the system before you program the rest of the options described in this chapter. The three available local system numbering plans listed below appear on System Planning Form 2a.
  • Page 488 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 4-18 Summary: Select System Numbering Plan Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition System idle Planning Form Form 2a, System Numbering: Extension Jacks Factory Setting Two-digit Valid Entries...
  • Page 489 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 4-19 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the appropriate system numbering plan. !  Ã Ä Select and go to Step 5. Å Select and go to Step 5.
  • Page 490 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 4-20 Single Renumbering Use this procedure to assign a specified extension number to a telephone, accessory, line, pool (Hybrid/PBX only), calling group, paging group, or Listed Directory Number.
  • Page 491 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 4-21 Block Renumbering Use this procedure to assign extension numbers to a group of extensions, accessories, or lines. Both the original numbers and the numbers they are being changed to must be sequentially numbered.
  • Page 492 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 4-22 Non-Local Dial Plan Extension Ranges There are two procedures in non-local numbering: Specifying new extension ranges Deleting extension ranges Chapter 3, “Common Administrative Procedures,” includes further details about this type of numbering.
  • Page 493 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 4-23 Summary: Deleting Extension Ranges Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition None Planning Form Form 2a, System Numbering: Extension Jacks Form 2b, System Numbering: Digital Adjuncts Form 2d, System Numbering: Special Renumbers Non-Local Dial Plan Administration Form in the Installation...
  • Page 494 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 4-24 Summary: Assign Direct Station Selector Page Buttons Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 6a, Optional Operator Features Factory Setting Page 1=0;...
  • Page 495 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 4-25 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the System Renumber menu. !  Press More. Select DSS Buttons. !  Ã...
  • Page 496 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 4-26 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current dial code ( nnnn ). !  n = page button entered in Step 5 OOOO Press Drop.
  • Page 497 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures System Operator Positions Page 4-27 System Operator Positions A system operator position, for a Queued Call Console (QCC) operator or a Direct-Line Console (DLC) operator, should be programmed before you program lines or trunks.

  • Page 498: System Operator Positions

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures System Operator Positions Page 4-28 DLC Operator Positions DLC operator positions can be assigned to the first and fifth extension jacks on the first modules with digital or analog multiline extension jacks. A maximum of eight DLC operator positions can be assigned.
  • Page 499 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-29 Lines and Trunks The procedures in this section are used to assign optional features to individual lines and trunks. The following optional features can be assigned: Type of Trunk Outmode Signaling for Loop- or Ground-Start Trunks Rotary Trunk Digit Transfer...
  • Page 500 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-30 Type of Trunk Use this procedure to specify the type of trunk, loop-start (LS) or ground-start (GS), for each outside trunk connected to one of the following modules: 400 GS/LS 408 GS/LS 800 GS/LS...

  • Page 501: Lines And Trunks

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-31 Procedure: Type of Trunk Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Æ Select Loop-Start/Ground-Start/DS1. !  Ã...
  • Page 502 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-32 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the type of trunks connected to the module. !  = 400, 408, 408-MLX, or 800 modules xx = slot number entered in Step 3 Ã...
  • Page 503 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-33 Outmode Signaling for Loop- or Ground-Start Trunks Use this procedure to identify either touch-tone signaling or rotary-dial signaling for outgoing calls placed by using the specified loop- or ground-start trunk. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE:...
  • Page 504 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-34 Procedure: Outmode Signaling for Loop- or Ground-Start Trunks Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Æ...
  • Page 505 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-35 Single Line Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify entry mode. È !  Select Enter the number of the line/trunk with touch-tone dialing. !  Ã...
  • Page 506 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-36 Block Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the block of 20 lines associated with 20 buttons on the system !  programming console.
  • Page 507 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-37 Procedure: Rotary Trunk Digit Transfer Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Options menu. !  É Go to the second screen of the Options menu. !  Press More.
  • Page 508 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-38 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Return to the System Programming menu. Ç !  Select Ringing Frequency Use this procedure to program the ringing frequency on an 016 module.
  • Page 509 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-39 Procedure: Ringing Frequency Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Options menu. !  É Go to the second screen of the Options menu. !  Press More.
  • Page 510 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-40 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify 20 Hz or 25 Hz. !  SvtvtÃA…r„)ÃÃÃÃÃTy‚‡ÃYY xx = slot number entered in Step 4 Ã...
  • Page 511 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-41 Procedure: Second Dial Tone Timer Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Options menu. !  É Go to the second screen of the Options menu. !  Press More.
  • Page 512 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-42 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the second dial tone timer !  ( nnnn = 0 to 5,000 ms, in increments of 200 ms). Ã...
  • Page 513 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-43 Summary: Disconnect Signaling Reliability Programmable by System Manager, Integrated Administration Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks Factory Setting Unreliable Valid Entries...
  • Page 514 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-44 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Loop-Start Disconnect. !  Ä Specify the disconnect signal as reliable or unreliable. !  Ã...
  • Page 515 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-45 Summary: Toll Type Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks Factory Setting Toll prefix required Valid Entries...
  • Page 516 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-46 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Toll Type. !  Specify the toll type line(s). !  For a single line, go to Single Line Procedure.
  • Page 517 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-47 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Assign or remove the toll prefix requirement from the line/trunk. !  Select You may continue to assign or remove the toll prefix requirement from additional lines/trunks by repeating Steps 2 and 3.
  • Page 518 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-48 NOTES: 1. If the disconnect interval is longer than the telephone company setting, the line is not released when a caller on hold hangs up. 2.
  • Page 519 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-49 Procedure: Hold Disconnect Interval Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Æ Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Press More.
  • Page 520 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-50 Single Line Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify entry mode. È !  Select Enter the number of the line or trunk with a long disconnect interval. !  Ã...
  • Page 521 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-51 Block Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the block of 20 lines associated with 20 buttons on the system !  programming console.
  • Page 522 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-52 Summary: Principal User for Personal Line Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone Form 4d, MLX Telephone Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX telephone Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment...
  • Page 523 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-53 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Principal User. !  Ä Enter the line or trunk number to which you are assigning a principal user. !  Ã...
  • Page 524 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-54 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Continue to assign a principal user to another line or trunk, or go to Step 9. !  Select Return to Step 6.
  • Page 525 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-55 Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk: Gvr†U…ˆx† R88ÃQ…v‚… More Dial priority level @‡r… Select entry mode Dial trunk no. @‡r…...
  • Page 526 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-56 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select QCC Queue Priority. !  Å Enter the QCC priority level ( n = 1 to 7). !  Ã...
  • Page 527 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-57 Single Line Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify entry mode. È !  Select Enter the line or trunk with the specified queue priority. !  Ã...
  • Page 528 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-58 Block Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify the block of 20 lines associated with the 20 line buttons on the system !  programming console.
  • Page 529 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-59 Summary: QCC Operator to Receive Calls Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks Factory Setting No QCC operator is assigned to receive calls.
  • Page 530 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-60 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Press More. Select QCC Operator. !  Æ...
  • Page 531 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-61 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the line(s) associated with the QCC operator. !  YYYY xxxx = extension number entered in Step 4 For a single line/trunk, go to Single Line Procedure.
  • Page 532 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-62 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Return to the System Programming menu. ÇÇ !  ([LW Select twice. Block Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the block of 20 lines associated with the 20 line buttons ! ...
  • Page 533 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-63 Any extension or adjunct that answers an incoming CO line on the first ring causes the Caller ID information associated with the call to be lost. The adjunct must be programmed to either answer the call on the second (or later) ring, or delay the call.
  • Page 534 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-64 Procedure: Loop-Start Identification Delay Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Æ Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Press More.
  • Page 535 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-65 Single Line Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify entry mode. È !  Select Enter the line/trunk number for LS-ID Delay. !  Ã...

  • Page 536: Clock Synchronization

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-66 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Return to the System Programming menu. ÇÇ !  Select twice. Clock Synchronization Use this procedure to specify the primary, secondary, and tertiary clock source. A clock source may be either a 100D module or a port on an 800 NI-BRI module.
  • Page 537 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-67 Summary: Clock Synchronization Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity 100D module Form 3i, Incoming Trunks: BRI Options Factory Setting Primary clock: the first 100D module in the control unit...
  • Page 538 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-68 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Press More. Select Clock Synchronization. !  É...
  • Page 539 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-69 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  (QWHU Select If the slot selected in Step 5 contains a 100D module, continue with Step 7.
  • Page 540 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-70 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the slot number of the module to contain the secondary !  system clock. Ã Dial or type [xx].
  • Page 541 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-71 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Tertiary. !  Å Enter the slot number of the module to contain the tertiary system clock. !  Ã...
  • Page 542 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-72 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the port on the 800 NI-BRI module to be the tertiary clock source. !  Ur…‡vh…’ÃG‚‚ƒ8yxÃTy‚‡ÃYY) @‡r…Â…‡Ãˆ€ir…à ' 7hpx†ƒhpr...
  • Page 543 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-73 If you want to reassign a line/trunk to a different pool, you must remove it from the current pool before you assign it to the new pool. Once you assign a line/trunk to a pool, it can be assigned to a button only on a direct-line console operator position;...
  • Page 544 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-74 Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk: Dial pool dial-out code Select entry mode Dial no. of the line/trunk To program a block of lines/trunks: Dial pool dial-out code Select block of lines/trunks...
  • Page 545 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-75 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the pool number. !  Ã Dial or type [ nnn ]. Save your entry. !  Select Specify the pool line(s).
  • Page 546 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-76 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Assign or remove the line/trunk from the pool. !  (QWHU Select You may continue to assign or remove additional lines/trunks from the pool by repeating Steps 2 and 3.
  • Page 547 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-77 Copy Options for Lines/Trunks Use this procedure to copy options assigned to loop-start or ground-start trunks, Tie trunks, or DID trunks. Note that many of these options apply to Hybrid/PBX systems only.
  • Page 548 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-78 Summary: Copy Options for Lines/Trunks Programmable by System Manager Mode All (but note differences) Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks Form 3c, Incoming Trunks: TIE Form 3d, Incoming Trunks: DID...
  • Page 549 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-79 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Copy. !  É Specify trunk(s). !  To copy a single trunk, Ã select and go to Single Trunk Procedure.
  • Page 550 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-80 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the trunk number to copy to. !  xxx = “copy from” trunk entered in Step 1 Ã...
  • Page 551 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-81 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the first trunk number to copy to. !  8PQ`ÃU…ˆxÃYYYÃU‚) xxx = “copy from” trunk entered in Step 1 @‡r…Ƈh…‡vtÇ…ˆxÃ...

  • Page 552: Uniform Dial Plan Facilities

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Facilities Page 4-82 Uniform Dial Plan Facilities Release 6.0 and later systems, Hybrid/PBX mode only, provide support for Uniform Dial Plan (UDP) facilities, networked lines/trunks originating at one or more other MERLIN LEGEND Communications Systems or DEFINITY Communications Systems.
  • Page 553 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Facilities Page 4-83 Wherever possible, the same switch identifiers should be used for the same switch across a network. For example, LEGEND A is identified by switch identifier 22 in LEGEND B and LEGEND C systems in a network.
  • Page 554 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Facilities Page 4-84 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Æ Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Press More.
  • Page 555 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Facilities Page 4-85 Single Trunk Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify a single trunk identifier. Ã !  Select Enter the number of the line/trunk. !  Ã...
  • Page 556 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Facilities Page 4-86 Block Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify identifiers for a block of trunks. Ä !  Select Enter the starting trunk number in the range. !  Ã...
  • Page 557 In Release 6.0 and later systems, you may order a point-to-point T1 circuit in order to provide amplification but not switching for a PRI tandem trunk that carries calls over long distances. PRI tandem trunks are preferable to T1 tandem trunks. Consult your Lucent Technologies representative for advice.
  • Page 558 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-88 If the type is T1 and the type of channel emulation is tie trunk, you must specify whether the lines/trunks are TIE-PBX, Toll, or Switched 56 Data service. The valid settings are as follows: TIE-PBX.

  • Page 559: Ds1 Facilities

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-89 In Release 6.0 and later systems, T1 S56 service is not supported for tandeming applications. Use PRI instead. If you select T1, channels can emulate ground- or loop-start trunks, tie trunks, or DID trunks in any combination.
  • Page 560 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-90 To select T1: DID: Dial slot no. More Dial channel To select T1- All Tie: Dial slot no. , or Dial channel no. To select T1- Tie: Dial slot , or...

  • Page 561: Switched 56 Data Signaling Options

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-91 Æ Ã  Ã Ã  Ã Ä To select T1- All Tie: Å  Ç Ç Ç Ç Type slot no. Æ...
  • Page 562 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-92 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Loop-Start/Ground-Start/DS1. !  Ã Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the 100D module !  ( nn = 1 to 17).
  • Page 563 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-93 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select a facility type. !  xx = slot number entered in Step 3 Ã Ä Select 7 or 35, .
  • Page 564 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-94 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select @‡r… . If you selected 6yyÃB…‚ˆq , 6yyÃG‚‚ƒ , 6yyà Vr„ˆvƒƒrq , or 6yyÃ9D9 , you have finished this procedure.
  • Page 565 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-95 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Continue to assign the channel to another slot or go to Step 13. !  Select Return to Step 10. The next slot is displayed on Line 1.
  • Page 566 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-96 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Assign or remove the channel. !  Select You may continue to assign or remove additional channels by repeating Steps 3 and 4. Continue to assign the channel to another slot or go to Step 6.
  • Page 567 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-97 S56 Data Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the channel number ( nn = 1 to 24). !  T$%Ã9h‡hÃGvr†ÃTy‚‡ÃYY) xx = slot number entered in Step x. @‡r…ÃpuhryÁˆ€Ã !# 9ryr‡r 7hpx†ƒhpr...
  • Page 568 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-98 Direction Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Direction. !  xx = channel selected in Step x. Ã Ä Å Select , or Continue to assign direction to the next channel or go to Step 3.
  • Page 569 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-99 Trunk Seizure Type Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Trunk Seizure Type. !  xx = channel selected in Step x. = In or Out Ã...
  • Page 570 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-100 ‹ Answer Supervision Timing Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current answer supervision time ( nnnn ) . !  xx = number entered in Step 1 OOOO Press Drop.
  • Page 571 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-101 Disconnect Timing Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current disconnect time ( nnnn ). !  T$%Ã9h‡h 8uÃYY xx = number entered in Step 1 Press Drop.
  • Page 572 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-102 Œ Dial Mode Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Choose an option. !  T$%Ã9h‡h) 8uÃYY xx = channel selected in Step x  = In or Out Ã...
  • Page 573 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-103 Direction Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Direction. !  Ã Ä Å Select , or Save your entry. !  Select ÇÇÇÇ...
  • Page 574 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-104 ‹ Answer Supervision Timing Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current answer supervision time ( nnnn ). !  T$%Ã9h‡h @‡r…Ã6†Tˆƒr…‰v†v‚Uv€r !#'Ãvp…r€r‡Ã! OOOO...
  • Page 575 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-105 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Return to the System Programming menu. ÇÇÇÇ !  Select four times. Œ...
  • Page 576 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-106 Switched 56 Dial Plan Routing Dial plan routing provides a way to route incoming calls received on a Switched 56 Network line. An incoming call is routed by matching the incoming number and then optionally deleting and/or adding digits to direct the call to a specific endpoint.
  • Page 577 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-107 Switched 56 Data Dial Plan Routing Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Ã Æ Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Press More.
  • Page 578 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-108 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information ‹ Select an option. à !  T$%Ã9h‡hÃ9vhyÃQyhÃS‡t) If you select @‘ƒrp‡rqÃ9vtv‡† , go to Expected Digits Procedure. Ä...
  • Page 579 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-109 Add Digits Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current number of digits to add ( nnnn = 0 to 9999). !  T$%Ã9h‡hÃ6qqÃ9vtv‡†) @‡r…Ãqvtv‡†Ã‡‚Ãhqq...
  • Page 580 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-110 Frame Format Use this procedure to specify the framing format for the 100D module as D4-compatible or Extended Superframe. Your selection must match the framing mode at the far end of the DS1 facility.
  • Page 581 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-111 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Loop-Start/Ground-Start/DS1. !  Ã Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the 100D module !  ( nn = 1 to 17).
  • Page 582 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-112 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Return to the System Programming menu. ÇÇ !  Select twice. If you are using PRI Facilities, go to “Zero Code Suppression.”...
  • Page 583 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-113 Procedure: Zero Code Suppression Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Æ Select Loop-Start/Ground-Start/DS1. !  Ã...

  • Page 584: Signaling Mode

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-114 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Suppression. !  9T ÃTy‚‡ÃYY xx = slot number entered in Step 3 Å Select AMI zero code suppression or bipolar 8 zero substitution. !  xx = slot number entered in Step 3 Ã...
  • Page 585 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-115 Factory Setting Robbed bit Valid Entries Robbed Bit, Common Channel Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure Dial slot no. Æ Ã  Æ Select type of signaling  Ç...
  • Page 586 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-116 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  (QWHU Select Select Signaling. !  9T ÃTy‚‡ÃYY xx = slot number entered in Step 3 Æ...
  • Page 587 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-117 Summary: Line Compensation Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition 100D module idle Planning Form Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity (100D module) Factory Setting 1 (0.6 dB loss) Valid Entries...
  • Page 588 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-118 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the 100D module !  ( nn = 1 to 17). Ã...
  • Page 589 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-119 Channel Service Unit Use this procedure to specify the type of equipment provided by the local telephone company as foreign exchange or special access. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE:...
  • Page 590 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-120 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Loop-Start/Ground-Start/DS1. !  Ã Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the 100D module !  ( nn = 1 to 17).

  • Page 591: Tie Trunks

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-121 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Return to the System Programming menu. ÇÇ !  Select twice. Tie Trunks This section covers programming procedures for the following tie trunk options: Direction...
  • Page 592 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-122 Copy Option Console Procedure Dial trunk no. Æ Ä Ã Specify direction  Ç Ç PC Procedure Type trunk no. Specify direction Procedure: Direction Console Display/Instructions Additional Information...
  • Page 593 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-123 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the tie trunk number. !  Ã Dial or type: Trunk number [ nnn ] Slot and port number [ sspp ] Logical ID number [ nnn ] Save your entry.
  • Page 594 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-124 Tie Trunk Seizure Type Use this procedure to specify whether the seizure type of incoming or outgoing tie trunk is wink, delay, immediate, or automatic. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE:...
  • Page 595 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-125 Procedure: Tie Trunk Type Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Æ Select Tie Lines. !  Ä...
  • Page 596 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-126 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Specify the tie trunk type. !  YYYY xxxx = trunk entered in Step 4 = option name selected in Step 3 is used for private tie trunks in R6.0 Ã...

  • Page 597: E&M Signal

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-127 E&M Signal Use this procedure to specify the type of tie trunk signal, as follows: E&M Mode: — 1S, Type 1 Standard. Tie trunks that are connected through the local telephone company.
  • Page 598 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-128 Procedure: E&M Signal Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Æ Select Tie Lines. !  Ä...
  • Page 599 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-129 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Specify the type of signaling for the trunk. !  U…ˆxÃYYY xxx = trunk entered in Step 4 Ã...
  • Page 600 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-130 Summary: Dial Mode Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 3c, Incoming Trunks: Tie Factory Setting Rotary Valid Entries Rotary, Touch-tone...
  • Page 601 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-131 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Tie Lines. !  Ä Select Inmode signaling or Outmode signaling. !  È É Select Specify the line(s).
  • Page 602 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-132 Single Line Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify entry mode. È !  Select Enter the number of the line/trunk. !  = option name selected in Step 3 Ã...
  • Page 603 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-133 Block Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the block of 20 lines associated with the 20 line buttons on the system !  programming console.
  • Page 604 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-134 Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk: Dial trunk no. To program a block of lines/trunks: Select block of lines/ trunks Toggle LED On/Off Æ...
  • Page 605 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-135 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Dial Tone. !  Specify the line(s). !  = option name selected in Step 3 For a single line, go to Single Line Procedure.
  • Page 606 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-136 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Assign or remove remote dial tone. !  Select You may continue to assign or remove remote dial tone from additional lines/trunks by repeating Steps 2 and 3.
  • Page 607 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-137 Tie Trunk Answer Supervision Time Use this procedure to specify the tie trunk answer supervision time in milliseconds. This is the time limit for the called system to respond. Summary: Tie Trunk Answer Supervision Time Programmable by System Manager...
  • Page 608 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-138 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Tie Lines. !  Ä Select Answer Supervision. !  Enter a tie trunk number. !  Ã...
  • Page 609 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-139 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current number of milliseconds ( nnnn ). !  U…ˆxÃYYYY xxxx = trunk entered in Step 4 OOOO Press Drop.
  • Page 610 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-140 Disconnect Time Use this procedure to specify the tie trunk disconnect time limit in milliseconds. Summary: Disconnect Time Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required...
  • Page 611 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-141 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Tie Lines. !  Ä Select Disconnect. !  Enter the trunk number. !  à Dial or type: Trunk number [ nnn ] 7hpx†ƒhpr...
  • Page 612 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-142 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current disconnect time ( nnnn ). !  U…ˆxÃYYYY xxxx = trunk entered in Step 4 OOOO Press Drop.

  • Page 613: Did Trunks

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-143 DID Trunks This section covers programming DID trunks and includes procedures for the following: Block Assignment DID Trunk Type Disconnect Time Expected Digits Delete Digits Add Digits...
  • Page 614 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-144 Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk: Dial trunk block no. Type the line/trunk no. To program a block of lines/trunks: Dial trunk block no.
  • Page 615 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-145 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Block Assignment. !  Ã Enter the trunk block ( n = 1 or 2). !  Ã...
  • Page 616 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-146 Single Line Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify entry mode. È !  Select Enter the trunk number. !  x = block entered in Step 4 Ã...
  • Page 617 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-147 Block Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify the DID trunks associated with 20 buttons on the system !  programming console. Ã...
  • Page 618 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-148 Procedure: DID Trunk Type Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Æ Select DID. !  Æ...
  • Page 619 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-149 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Specify immediate-start or wink-start. !  x = block number entered in Step 4 Ã...
  • Page 620 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-150 Inspect Copy Option /LQHV7UXQNV 'LVFRQQHFW Console Procedure Dial trunk no. Æ Æ Å (QWHU (QWHU ([LW ([LW Drop Dial no. of ms  Ç...
  • Page 621 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-151 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the DID trunk. !  Ã Dial or type: Trunk number [ nnn ] Slot and port number [ sspp ] Logical ID number [ nnn ] Save your entry.
  • Page 622 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-152 Expected Digits Use this procedure to tell the system how many digits are sent by the local telephone company. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: In Release 6.0 and later systems, if the dialed digits received on a DID trunk correspond to a non-local extension number, the call is routed to that...
  • Page 623 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-153 Procedure: Expected Digits Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Æ Select DID. !  Æ Select Expected Digits.
  • Page 624 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-154 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Erase the current number of expected digits ( n ). !  x = block entered in Step 4 Press Drop.

  • Page 625: Delete Digits

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-155 Delete Digits Use this procedure to specify the number of leading digits to be deleted from the digits sent by the local telephone company. Use this procedure when the number of digits sent by the telephone company is greater than the number in the system numbering plan.
  • Page 626 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-156 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select DID. !  Æ Select Delete Digit. !  È Enter the trunk block ( n = 1 or 2). !  Ã...
  • Page 627 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-157 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current number of delete digits ( n ). !  x = block entered in Step 4 Press Drop.

  • Page 628: Add Digits

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-158 Add Digits Use this procedure to specify the number of leading digits that must be added to the digits sent by the local telephone company. Use this procedure when the number of digits sent by the telephone company is fewer than the number in the system numbering plan.
  • Page 629 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-159 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select DID. !  Æ Select Add Digits. !  É Enter the trunk block ( n = 1 or 2 ). !  Ã...
  • Page 630 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-160 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current number of added digits ( nnn ). !  x = block entered in Step 4 Press Drop.
  • Page 631 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-161 Summary: Signaling Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not Required Planning Form Form 3d, Incoming Trunks: DID Factory Setting Rotary Valid Entries Rotary, Touch-tone...
  • Page 632 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-162 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Signaling. !  Enter the trunk block ( n = 1 or 2). !  Ã Dial or type [ n ].
  • Page 633 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-163 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Return to the System Programming menu. ÇÇ !  Select twice. Invalid Destination Use this procedure to specify where to direct outside calls (received on DID trunks) for unassigned extension numbers.
  • Page 634 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-164 Procedure: Invalid Destination Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Æ Select DID. !  Æ Select Invalid Destination.

  • Page 635: Pri Facilities

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-165 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Return to the System Programming menu. ÇÇ !  Select twice. PRI Facilities The procedures in this section provide the steps for programming the following options for Primary Rate Interface (PRI) facilities connected to a 100D (DS1)
  • Page 636 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-166 NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: If you are adding PRI facilities to an existing system, certain values must be set correctly. To inspect or change these values, see “DS1 Facilities”...
  • Page 637 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-167 The following rules apply to PRI tandem trunks in PBX or network mode: A single unused B-channel group number is automatically assigned to all 23 B-channels on the trunk;...
  • Page 638 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-168 Procedure: Switch Type Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Æ Select PRI. !  È Select Switch Type.
  • Page 639 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-169 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Specify the switch type. !  Ã Press the button or function key next to your selection.
  • Page 640 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-170 Copy Option Console Procedure Dial trunk no. Æ È Ã Drop Dial telephone no. Ç Ç PC Procedure Type trunk no. Type telephone no.
  • Page 641 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-171 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the line number. !  Ã Dial or type: Trunk number [ nnn ] Slot and port number [ sspp ] Logical ID number [ nnn ]...

  • Page 642: B-Channel Groups

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-172 B-Channel Groups Use this procedure to perform the following: Assign B-channels to a group. Associate individual ISDN channels (that can place and receive calls) on the B-channels in each group.
  • Page 643 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-173 Summary: B-Channel Groups Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX, Key Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity (100D module) Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries...
  • Page 644 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-174 Procedure: B-Channel Groups Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Æ Select PRI. !  È Select B-Channel Groups.
  • Page 645 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-175 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the B-channel group number ( nn = 1 to 80). !  Ã Dial or type [ nn ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 646 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-176 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Lines. !  Ä Enter the B-channel group number ( nn = 1 to 80 ). !  Ã...
  • Page 647 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-177 Single Line Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify entry mode. È !  Select Enter a line number. !  xx = number entered in Step 12 Ã...
  • Page 648 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-178 Block Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify the block of 20 lines associated with 20 buttons on the system !  programming console.
  • Page 649 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-179 Summary: Network Service Programmable by. System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX, Key Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity (100D module) Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries...
  • Page 650 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-180 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select B-Channel Groups. !  Ä Select Network Service. !  Å Enter the B-channel group number ( nn = 1 to 80 ). !  Ã...
  • Page 651 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-181 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information ‹ Specify a network service. Ã !  If you select , go to Ä AT&T Toll Procedure. If you select , go to Å...
  • Page 652 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-182 5ESS Local Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify a 5ESS local service. !  xx = number entered in Step 5 Ã...
  • Page 653 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-183 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  (QWHU Select Return to the System Programming menu. ÇÇÇÇ !  ([LW Select four times.
  • Page 654 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-184 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Repeat Steps 5 through 7 of the main procedure for each !  miscellaneous service group number. ÇÇÇÇ...
  • Page 655 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-185 Copy Telephone Number to Send Use this procedure to indicate whether or not the telephone number to send to the network (for calls going out over ISDN lines assigned to a B-channel group) is copied from the number assigned to that channel.
  • Page 656 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-186 Procedure: Copy Telephone Number to Send Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Æ Select PRI. !  È...
  • Page 657 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-187 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the B-channel group number ( nn = 1 to 80) . !  Ã Dial or type [ nn ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 658 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-188 Incoming Routing Use this procedure to specify whether incoming routing is either by line appearance or according to dial plan. Dial Plan Routing is available in Hybrid/PBX mode only.
  • Page 659 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-189 Procedure: Incoming Routing Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Æ Select PRI. !  È Select B-Channel Groups.
  • Page 660 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-190 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the B-channel group number ( nn = 1 to 80 ). !  Ã Dial or type [ nn ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 661 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-191 Telephone Number to Send Use this procedure to assign the telephone number to send to the network when outgoing calls are made on an ISDN line. If the person being called subscribes to an automatic number identification service, the number indicates who is calling.
  • Page 662 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-192 Procedure: Telephone Number to Send Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Æ Select PRI. !  È...
  • Page 663 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-193 Base Number with Extension Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current base number ( N ). !  %DFNVSDFH ([LW (QWHU Press Drop.
  • Page 664 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-194 Line Telephone Number Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the line number ( nnn ). !  Ã Dial or type [ nnn ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 665 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-195 Test Telephone Number Use this procedure to assign a test line or trunk telephone number for each 100D module installed in the control unit. The number assigned to the test line/trunk must be different from the numbers assigned to other channels in the same B-channel group.
  • Page 666 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-196 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select PRI. !  È Select Test Telephone Number. !  Æ Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the 100D module !  ( nn = 1 to 17).
  • Page 667 The factory settings for these thresholds are standard and rarely need to be changed. If you are not sure of the correct timer and threshold settings for your PRI lines and trunks, check with your Lucent Technologies representative before you make a change. Incorrect settings can cause...
  • Page 668 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-198 If the network does not respond before the programmed time or count, the system takes the appropriate corrective action. The timers and counters are listed below. T200 Timer.

  • Page 669: Timers And Counters

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-199 Summary: Timers and Counters Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity (100D module) Factory Setting Table 4–2 Valid Entries...
  • Page 670 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-200 Procedure: Timers and Counters Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Æ Select PRI. !  È...
  • Page 671 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-201 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the number of the slot in the control unit that contains !  the 100D module ( nn = 1 to 17). Ã...
  • Page 672 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-202 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current setting. !  Press Drop. Enter the new setting (see Table 4–2). !  Ã...
  • Page 673 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-203 Terminal Equipment Identifier Use this procedure to assign the link layer address of a piece of equipment connected to each D-channel. Normally, only one piece is connected and the system assumes that the Terminal Equipment Identifier (TEI) is 0.
  • Page 674 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-204 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select PRI. !  È Select Protocol. !  È Select TEI. !  Ä Enter the number of the slot in the control unit that contains !  the 100D module ( nn = 1 to 17).
  • Page 675 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-205 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Erase the current identification number ( nn ). !  Ty‚‡ÃYY xx = number entered in Step 5 Press Drop.
  • Page 676 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-206 Dial Plan Routing Dial plan routing provides a way to route incoming calls on a “per B-channel group” basis. An incoming call is routed by matching the incoming number (by service, number of digits, and pattern) and then optionally deleting and/or adding digits to direct the call to a specific endpoint.
  • Page 677 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-207 Summary: Dial Plan Routing Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity (100D module) Factory Setting Service: empty;...
  • Page 678 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-208 Æ È É Å To specify Total Digits:  Ç Ç Ç Type entry no. Type digits Æ È É Æ To specify Delete Digits:  Ç...
  • Page 679 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-209 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Service. Ã !  Tr…‰vpr must be programmed. Continue with Step 5. Then program other options. Ä...
  • Page 680 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-210 AT&T Toll Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select an AT&T service for the B-channel group. !  xx = number entered in Step 5 Ã...
  • Page 681 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-211 Local Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select a service for the B-channel group. !  9vhyÃQyhÃS‡tÃ@‡…’ÃYY xx = number entered in Step 5 Ã...
  • Page 682 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-212 MCI Toll Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select a miscellaneous service. !  xx = number entered in Step 5 Ã Ä...
  • Page 683 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-213 Miscellaneous Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select a miscellaneous service. !  = number entered in Step 5 Ã Ä Select Å...
  • Page 684 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-214 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Program additional options by returning to Step 4 of the main !  procedure or go to Step 9.
  • Page 685 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-215 Patterns Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the entry number ( nn = 0 to 15). !  9vhyQyhS‚ˆ‡vtQh‡‡r…†) Leave field blank to match any pattern. @‡r…Ãr‡…’Á‚à $ 7hpx†ƒhpr Ã...
  • Page 686 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-216 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Program additional options by returning to Step 4 of the main !  procedure or go to Step 8. Return to the System Programming menu.
  • Page 687 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-217 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Continue to assign the digits to another routing entry or go to Step 6. !  Select Return to Step 3.
  • Page 688 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-218 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current number of delete digits ( nn ). !  9vhyÃQyhÃS‡tÃ@‡…’ÃYY xx = number entered in Step 1 Press Drop.
  • Page 689 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-219 Add Digits Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the entry number ( nn = 0 to 15). !  9vhyQyhS‡tÃ6qq9vtv‡†) @‡r…Ãr‡…’Á‚à $ 7hpx†ƒhpr Ã...
  • Page 690 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-220 Outgoing Tables PRI provides tables that work in conjunction with personal lines, pools, and ARS tables to route calls. The following tables specify services for outgoing calls: Call-by-Call.
  • Page 691 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-221 Summary: Network Selection Tables Programmable by System Manager Mode Key and Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1Connectivity (100D module) Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries...
  • Page 692 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-222 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Outgoing Tables. !  Select Network Selection tables. !  Ã Enter the table number ( n = 0 to 3). !  Ã...
  • Page 693 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-223 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current dial prefix ( n ). !  x = number entered in Step 5 Press Drop.
  • Page 694 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-224 Summary: Special Services Tables Programmable by System Manager Mode Key and Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity (100D module) Factory Setting Table 4–3 Valid Entries...

  • Page 695: Special Services Table

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-225 Table 4–3. Special Services Table Pattern Delete Digits Table (up to 4 digits) Operator (0 to 4) none Local Operator Local Operator Local Operator/ Presubscribed Carrier Local Operator...
  • Page 696 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-226 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Outgoing Tables. !  Select the Special Services tables. !  Ä Select an option. !  Ã...
  • Page 697 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-227 Pattern Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the table number ( n = 0 to 7). !  Ã Dial or type [ n ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 698 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-228 Operator Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the table number ( n = 0 to 7). !  TƒrpvhyÃTr…‰vpr†ÃUhiyr) @‡r…Ãr‡…’Áˆ€ir…Ã& 7hpx†ƒhpr Ã...
  • Page 699 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-229 Type Of Number Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the table number ( n = 0 to 7). !  Ã Dial or type [ n ].
  • Page 700 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-230 Delete Digits Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the table number ( n = 0 to 7). !  TƒrpvhyÃTr…‰vpr†ÃUhiyr) @‡r…Ãr‡…’Áˆ€ir…Ã& 7hpx†ƒhpr Ã...
  • Page 701 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-231 Call-by-Call Service Table When a call is placed on a Call-by-Call B-channel group, a specific service is selected. The selected service depends on the match between the dialed digits and the table entries.
  • Page 702 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-232 Valid Entries Pattern: up to eight digits Call Type: voice, data, both Service: AT&T Toll, 5ESS Local, MCI Toll, DMS-100 Local, Miscellaneous Delete Digits: 0 to 8 Inspect...
  • Page 703 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-233 Procedure: Call-by-Call Service Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Æ Select PRI. !  È Select Outgoing Tables.
  • Page 704 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-234 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select an option. !  Ã If you select , go to Patterns Procedure. Ä If you select , go to Voice/Data Procedure.
  • Page 705 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-235 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter a pattern of up to eight digits ( n = 0 to 9). !  Ã Dial or type [ n ].
  • Page 706 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-236 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify voice, data, or both. !  x = number entered in Step 1 Ã Ä Select Å...
  • Page 707 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-237 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information ‹ Specify a Network Service. !  Ã If you select , go to AT&T Toll Procedure. Ä...
  • Page 708 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-238 ‹ 5ESS Local Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify a local service. !  x = number entered in Step 1 of the Network Service Procedure.
  • Page 709 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-239 MCI Toll Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify an MCI Toll service. !  x = number entered in Step 1 of the Network Service Procedure.
  • Page 710 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-240 Miscellaneous Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify a service. !  878ÃTr…‰vprÃGv†‡ÃY x = number entered in Step 1 of the Ã...
  • Page 711 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-241 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Return to the System Programming menu. ÇÇÇÇ !  Select four times. DMS-100 Local Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information...
  • Page 712 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-242 Delete Digits Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the list number ( n = 0 to 9). !  878ÃTr…‰9ryr‡rÃ9vtv‡†) @‡r…Ãyv†‡Ãˆ€ir…Ã( 7hpx†ƒhpr Ã...

  • Page 713: Bri Facilities

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures BRI Facilities Page 4-243 BRI Facilities The procedures in this section provide the steps for programming the following options for Basic Rate Interface (BRI) facilities connected to an 800 NI-BRI module: Service Profile Identifier (SPID) and Directory Number (DN) Timers...
  • Page 714 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures BRI Facilities Page 4-244 Console Procedure More Dial line/trunk Dial SPID Dial DN Æ   Ã  Ç Ç PC Procedure Type line/trunk no. Type SPID Type DN Procedure: Service Profile Identifier (SPID) and...
  • Page 715 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures BRI Facilities Page 4-245 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Service Profile Identifier (SPID) and Directory Number (DN). !  à Select Enter the line/trunk number ( nnn = 1 to 80). !  7hpx†ƒhpr Ã...
  • Page 716 The factory settings for these thresholds are standard and rarely need to be changed. If you are not sure of the correct timer and threshold settings for your BRI lines and trunks, check with your Lucent Technologies representative before you make a change. Incorrect settings can cause your BRI lines and trunks to malfunction.

  • Page 717: Timers

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures BRI Facilities Page 4-247 T303 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the communications system sends a setup message to initiate an outgoing call. T305 Timer.
  • Page 718 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures BRI Facilities Page 4-248 /LQHV7UXQNV 7LPHUV Console Procedure More Select timer Æ   Ä (QWHU ([LW ([LW Drop Dial no. of seconds or ms  Ç...
  • Page 719 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Programming Procedures BRI Facilities Page 4-249 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Timers. !  Ä Select the timer to change. !  Erase the current setting. !  Press Drop.

  • Page 720: Extensions

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-250 Extensions This section contains the following summaries: Assigning outside lines or trunks to the buttons on a telephone (including lines and trunks used for loudspeaker paging). Copying line button assignments from one extension to either an individual extension or a block of extensions.
  • Page 721 (such as the American Society of Composers, Artists, and Producers or Broadcast Music Incorporated). Magic on Hold requires no such license and can be purchased from Lucent Technologies. Pool buttons cannot be assigned to or removed from extensions unless the pool has trunks assigned.
  • Page 722 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-252 Summary: Assign Trunks or Pools to Extensions Programmable by System Manager Mode All, but note differences in factory settings Idle Condition Extension idle Planning Form Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone...
  • Page 723 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-253 Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk: Dial ext. no. Dial line/trunk no. To program a block of lines/trunks: Dial ext. no. Select trunk range Toggle LED On/Off...
  • Page 724 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-254 Summary: Copy Line/Trunk Assignments Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Extension idle Planning Form 4a, Extension Copy: Analog Multiline Telephone Template 4c, Extension Copy: MLX Telephone Template Factory Setting Not applicable...
  • Page 725 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-255 Assign Intercom or System Access Buttons Use this procedure to assign or change the assignments for Intercom (ICOM) buttons used to make and receive inside calls. This includes the following types of Intercom buttons: Ring Voice...
  • Page 726 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-256 Each System Access Ring or Voice on an individual telephone can be assigned as a Shared System Access (SSA) button on up to 16 other extensions.
  • Page 727 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-257 Behind Switch Mode. An Intercom Ring, an Intercom Voice, and a prime line button are assigned to all analog multiline and MLX telephones, excluding operator positions. Two Intercom Ring buttons and a prime line button are assigned to tip/ring equipment connected to an 012 module.
  • Page 728 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-258 Analog Multiline Telephone without Built-in Speakerphone (BIS) or Hands Free Answer on Intercom (HFAI) Capability Use this procedure to identify analog multiline telephones with flat membrane buttons that do not have built-in speakerphones (BIS) or Hands Free Answer on Intercom (HFAI) capability.
  • Page 729 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-259 Analog Multiline Telephones with Voice Announce to Busy Use this procedure to dedicate a voice or voice pair to provide the Voice Announce to Busy feature on an analog multiline telephone.

  • Page 730: Music On Hold

    [such as the American Society of Composers, Artists, and Producers (ASCAP) or Broadcast Music Incorporated (BMI)]. Magic on Hold requires no such license and can be purchased from your Lucent Technologies dealer. Only one Music on Hold line/trunk jack is allowed per system.
  • Page 731 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-261 Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure Dial line/trunk no.  Ã  Ç PC Procedure Type line/trunk no. Procedure: Music on Hold Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Auxiliary Equipment menu.

  • Page 732: Loudspeaker Paging

    (such as ASCAP or BMI). Magic on Hold requires no such license and can be purchased from your Lucent Technologies dealer. A maximum of three single-zone or multizone loudspeaker paging systems can be connected to the system.
  • Page 733 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-263 Procedure: Loudspeaker Paging Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Auxiliary Equipment menu. !  Select Loudspeaker Page. !  Ä Enter the line/trunk. !  If the line/trunk appears on the screen and you want to remove the loudspeaker...
  • Page 734 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-264 Fax Machines Use this procedure to identify the extension jacks used to connect fax machines. In addition, you can specify the extensions to receive a message-waiting indication (MWI) when a fax transmission is received, and specify the length of time before the system registers that a fax has arrived and sends the message- waiting indication.

  • Page 735: Maintenance Alarms

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-265 Maintenance Alarms Use this procedure to identify the line/trunk jack that connects an external alerting device that sounds or flashes when major maintenance problems occur. You cannot assign the line/trunk identified for the maintenance alarm to a button on any telephone or as a Remote Access trunk, and you cannot use its line/trunk jack to connect a loudspeaker paging system or Music on Hold.
  • Page 736 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-266 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Maintenance Alarms. !  Æ Enter the line/trunk jack to which the maintenance alarm is connected. !  Ã...
  • Page 737 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-267 In addition, this procedure can be used to specify the number of rings before a call transferred by the voice messaging system is sent to the backup position for both integrated and generic VMI ports.
  • Page 738 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-268 Procedure: Voice Messaging System and Automated Attendant Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Auxiliary Equipment menu. !  Select Voice Messaging/Automated Attendant. !  È...
  • Page 739 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-269 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the number of rings before calls are transferred to the backup position !  ( n = 0 to 9). Use 0 to specify that calls are not transferred to backup position.
  • Page 740 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-270 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Touch-Tone Interval. !  If you do not want to change the setting for touch-tone interval, you have finished this procedure.
  • Page 741 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-271 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Link Release 5.0 and later supports the use of an MLX port as a Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) link. The CTI link allows applications residing on client PCs on a LAN to communicate more easily with the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System over a network that has a PassageWay Telephony Server for NetWare.
  • Page 742 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-272 NOTES: 1. Be sure to restore the board after finishing any programming activities. 2. If the primary and secondary cover buttons are not removed, the following message appears on the programming device (SPM or MLX-20L).
  • Page 743 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-273 È Ä  Ä Ã PC Procedure Busy out the board first: Type the slot no.  É  Ç Ç Program the CTI link: Type extension number Restore the slot.
  • Page 744 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-274 Save your entry. !  (QWHU Select Return to the System Programming menu. ÇÇ !  ([LW Select twice. CTI Link Programming Errors During the programming of the CTI link, entering an inappropriate extension number can give you an error message.
  • Page 745 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-275 Extension Selected Is System Programming Port YYYY This message appears if you have chosen an extension that has been programmed as a system programming port, which is not permitted as the CTI link port.
  • Page 746 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-276 Port Reserved for Operator Positions YYYY This message appears when the port that you are programming as the CTI link is on the Operator Position list (as a QCC or DLC).
  • Page 747 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 4-277 Optional Extension Features The summaries in this section detail the steps in programming the following optional features: Extension Language Pool Dial-Out Code Calling Restrictions Copy Calling Restrictions...

  • Page 748: Optional Extension Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 4-278 Console Procedure To program a single extension: More Dial ext. no. Select a language To program a block of extensions: More Dial starting ext.
  • Page 749 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 4-279 Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital Form 5c, MFM Adjunct (DLC): Digital Form 5d, Queued Call Console (QCC) Data Form 1a, Modem Data Workstation Data Form 1b, ISDN Terminal Adapter Data Workstation...
  • Page 750 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 4-280 Summary: Calling Restrictions Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Extension idle Planning Form Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone Form 4d, MLX Telephone Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment...
  • Page 751 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 4-281 The extensions you are copying to and from can be both operator and nonoperator positions. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: Dial-out code restrictions are not copied. Summary: Copy Calling Restrictions Programmable by System Manager...
  • Page 752 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 4-282 ARS Restriction Level For Extensions Use this procedure to assign an ARS restriction level to an extension. Only outgoing calls are affected; users can receive inside, local, and toll calls on restricted extensions and can join any type of call in progress.
  • Page 753 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 4-283 Forced Account Code Entry Use this procedure to assign or remove Forced Account Code Entry. When this feature is programmed on individual extensions, the user must enter a 1- to 16-digit account code before making an outside call.
  • Page 754 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 4-284 Microphone Operation Use this procedure to enable or disable microphones on MLX telephones (except QCC operator positions). When the microphone is disabled, users cannot use the speakerphone to conduct conversations.
  • Page 755 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 4-285 Authorization Codes Use this procedure to assign an authorization code to an extension. The authorization code can range from 2 to 11 characters (0 - 9, ) and must be unique for each extension.
  • Page 756 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 4-286 Remote Call Forwarding Use this procedure to allow or disallow the Remote Call Forwarding capability, which permits users to forward calls to an outside number. In Release 6.0 and later systems, Remote Call Forwarding must be enabled in order for an extension user to activate Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding.
  • Page 757 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 4-287 Copy Option Console Procedure More Toggle LED On/Off or È   Dial ext. no.  Ç Ç PC Procedure Toggle letter On/Off or type ext.
  • Page 758 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 4-288 Copy Option Console Procedure More Dial ext. no. È   Dial no. of delay rings  Ç Ç PC Procedure Type ext.

  • Page 759: Optional Operator Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Operator Features Page 4-289 Optional Operator Features The summaries in this section affect feature programming for both DLC and QCC operator positions and include the following: Operator Hold Timer DLC Operator Automatic Hold QCC operator features are covered in the next section.
  • Page 760 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Operator Features Page 4-290 DLC Operator Automatic Hold Use this procedure to enable or disable the DLC Operator Automatic Hold feature for DLC operator positions. When this feature is enabled, it prevents accidental call disconnection.
  • Page 761 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 4-291 QCC Optional Features This section contains programming summaries for the following options for QCC operator positions: Hold Return Automatic Hold or Release Queue over Threshold Elevate Priority Calls-in-Queue Alert...
  • Page 762 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 4-292 Summary: Hold Return Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 6a, Optional Operator Features Factory Setting Calls remain on hold Valid Entries...

  • Page 763: Qcc Optional Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 4-293 Queue over Threshold Use this procedure to specify the maximum number of calls (threshold) in the QCC queue before system operators are notified with a tone that the threshold has been reached or exceeded.
  • Page 764 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 4-294 Console Procedure Drop Å Ä Æ U Dial no. of seconds  Ç Ç PC Procedure Type no. of seconds Calls-In-Queue Alert Use this procedure to specify whether each QCC operator is notified (with a single beep) when a new call enters the QCC queue.
  • Page 765 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 4-295 Summary: QCC Operator to Receive Call Types Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 6a, Optional Operator Features Factory Setting QCC operator receives the following calls:...
  • Page 766 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 4-296 Console Procedure Select call type Drop Dial priority level Å Ä É Ã U  Ç Ç Ç Ç PC Procedure Select call type Type priority level...
  • Page 767 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 4-297 Extended (Directed) Call Completion Use this procedure to specify one of the two basic options shown below for QCC operator positions with a DSS only: Automatic Completion.
  • Page 768 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 4-298 Summary: Return Ring Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 6a, Optional Operator Features Factory Setting 4 rings Valid Entries...
  • Page 769 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 4-299 Console Procedure More Drop Å Ä  Ã U Dial ext. number Ç Ç PC Procedure Type ext. no. Voice Announce Use this procedure to enable or disable Voice Announce for the QCC.
  • Page 770 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 4-300 Optional Group Features This section contains programming summaries for the following optional features: Pickup Groups Group Paging Group Coverage Member Assignments Group Coverage Delay Interval (Release 4.0 and earlier) Group Calling Member Assignments Group Calling Line/Trunk or Pool Assignments...

  • Page 771: Optional Group Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 4-301 Console Procedure Dial pickup group no. È  Dial ext. no.  Ç Ç PC Procedure Type pickup group no. Type ext.
  • Page 772 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 4-302 Group Coverage Member Assignments Use this procedure to assign or remove an extension from a coverage group. A coverage group is a group of senders. Coverage is an arrangement in which calls from a group of senders are redirected to one or more receivers.
  • Page 773 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 4-303 Console Procedure More Dial group no. È  Å Dial ext. no.  Ç Ç PC Procedure Type group no. Type ext.
  • Page 774 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 4-304 Group Calling Member Assignments Use this procedure to assign or remove an extension from a calling group. A calling group is used to direct calls to a group of people who all handle the same type of call.
  • Page 775 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 4-305 Group Calling Line/Trunk or Pool Assignments Use this procedure to assign or remove lines, trunks, or pools (Hybrid/PBX only) that ring directly into a calling group.
  • Page 776 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 4-306 Optional Group Calling Features This section includes programming summaries for the following optional group calling features: Hunt Type Group Calling Delay Announcement Group Calling Announcement Interval Group Calling Repeat Announcement...
  • Page 777 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 4-307 Summary: Hunt Type Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 7d, Group Calling Factory Setting Circular hunting pattern Valid Entries...

  • Page 778: Optional Group Calling Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 4-308 Summary: Group Calling Delay Announcement Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 7d, Group Calling Factory Setting No delay announcement devices are assigned Valid Entries...
  • Page 779 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 4-309 Group Calling Repeat Announcement Use this procedure to set the secondary announcement to repeat after the Announcement Interval. Summary: Group Calling Repeat Announcement Programmable by System Manager...
  • Page 780 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 4-310 Valid Entries Group numbers Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure More Dial calling group ext. no. Dial coverage group no. È...
  • Page 781 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 4-311 Summary: Group Calling Overflow and Thresholds Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 7d, Group Calling Factory Setting Overflow coverage: none Threshold: 1 call...
  • Page 782 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 4-312 Summary: Group Calling Message-Waiting Indicator Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 7d, Group Calling Factory Setting No message-waiting receiver assigned Valid Entries...
  • Page 783 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 4-313 Summary: Group Calling Calls-In-Queue Alarm Threshold Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 7d, Group Calling Factory Settings 1 call, for all Thresholds Valid Entries...
  • Page 784 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 4-314 Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure More Dial calling group ext. no. Drop Dial ext. no. for È  Æ É alert  Ç...
  • Page 785 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 4-315 Copy Option Console Procedure More More Type Dial calling group ext. no. Specify login È  Æ  type  Ç...
  • Page 786 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 4-316 When a call arrives on one of the above facilities, it is added to the calling group queue, even if that queue has reached or exceeded the programmed maximum number of calls.

  • Page 787: System Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-317 System Features This section contains programming summaries for the optional system features that affect all or most system users and includes the following: Transfer Return Time One-Touch Transfer/Hold Transfer Audible...
  • Page 788 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-318 Transfer Return Time Use this procedure to specify the number of times the telephone rings before a call transferred to another inside telephone is returned to the originator. A setting of 0 means that transferred calls are never returned to the originator.
  • Page 789 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-319 One-Touch Hold applies to incoming central office calls only. When the user presses an Auto Dial or DSS button to initiate a transfer, the outside caller is put on hold.
  • Page 790 Composers, Artists, and Producers or Broadcast Music Incorporated). Magic on Hold requires no such license and can be purchased from Lucent Technologies. 2. In Release 6.0 and later systems, when extensions are programmed to use the Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding feature, do not program Music On Hold as the transfer audible.
  • Page 791 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-321 Type of Transfer Use this procedure to specify whether the system automatically selects an Intercom or System Access Ring or Voice button when the Transfer button, or an Auto Dial or DSS button (for One-Touch Transfer) is pressed.
  • Page 792 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-322 Console Procedure Drop Dial no. of seconds É Ä U  Ç PC Procedure Type no. of seconds Call Park Return Time Use this procedure to specify the number of seconds before a call put on hold with the Park feature is returned to the originator.
  • Page 793 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-323 Factory Setting 2 rings Valid Entries 1 to 6 rings Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure Drop Dial no. of rings É...
  • Page 794 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-324 Extension Status Use this procedure to specify whether the Extension Status (ES) feature is used in Hotel mode or Group Calling/Call Management System (CMS) mode. The calling mode affects the meaning of the LEDs and the use of Auto Dial or DSS buttons when the DLC operator position is in Extension Status mode.
  • Page 795 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-325 SMDR Language Use this procedure to change the language of the SMDR reports. It applies to Releases 1.1 and later only. The default report language is the same as that set for the system language.
  • Page 796 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-326 Copy Option Console Procedure É  Ã Ã Ä  Ç Ç PC Procedure SMDR Call Length Use this procedure to set the minimum time length of a call before it is recorded on SMDR call reports.
  • Page 797 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-327 SMDR Calls Recorded on Call Report Use this procedure to specify whether SMDR information should be recorded for both incoming and outgoing calls or for outgoing calls only. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE:...
  • Page 798 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-328 Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure É  È Ã Ä  Ç Ç PC Procedure SMDR Talk Time In Release 4.2 and later systems, the Talk field was added to the SMDR call record.
  • Page 799 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-329 Inside Dial Tone Use this procedure to set the inside (system) dial tone to be either different from, or the same as, the outside line/trunk dial tone. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE:...
  • Page 800 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-330 Reminder Service Cancel Use this procedure to set the time of day when all programmed Reminder Service calls are automatically canceled. To deactivate Reminder Service Cancel, erase the currently programmed time and do not enter a new time.
  • Page 801 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-331 Redirect Outside Calls to Unassigned Extension Numbers Use this procedure to specify the extension number to receive redirected calls. Redirected calls include calls made to unassigned numbers by remote access users, by users on DID trunks (Hybrid/PBX only), or by users on dial-in tie trunks.
  • Page 802 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-332 Host System Dial Codes for Behind Switch Mode Use this procedure to assign the host system dial codes for the Transfer, Conference, and Drop features.
  • Page 803 Setting interdigit timers to shorter times permits the call to be put on hold or transferred. If you are experiencing these types of problems, call the Lucent Technologies BCS Helpline at 1 800 628-2888.
  • Page 804 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-334 Allowed Lists Use this procedure to establish Allowed Lists. These lists are telephone numbers that can be dialed from specified telephones, regardless of any calling restrictions that are assigned to the telephones.
  • Page 805 1809, 1900, and 976 or 1(wildcard)976. In Release 3.1 and later systems, Disallowed List number 7 does not include 800 and 1800 and 411 and 1411, but Lucent Technologies recommends that you add them. Assign all voice mail port extensions to this Disallowed List. Lucent Technologies recommends assigning Disallowed List number 7.
  • Page 806 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-336 Summary: Disallowed Lists Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 6g, Call Restriction Assignments and Lists Factory Setting List #7 containing the following: 0, 10, 11, 1809, 1700, 1900, 976,...
  • Page 807 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-337 Remote Access Features This section covers the following Remote Access features: Remote Access over Networked Tandem and Tie Trunks (Release 6.0 and later systems only) Remote Access Trunk Assignment Remote Access Automatic Callback...
  • Page 808 Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
  • Page 809 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-339 Remote Access over Networked Tandem PRI and Tie Trunks In Release 6.0 and later systems, Hybrid/PBX mode only, an ARS call originating at a remote, networked communications system can arrive on a networked tie or PRI trunk of the local system and receive remote-access treatment automatically.
  • Page 810 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-340 Specify that all tie trunks (that is, networked tandem tie trunks) and/or all non-tie trunks (that is, all PRI tandem trunks) will not require barrier codes. This does not affect calls dialing the remote access code if the trunks on the remote system are regular, assigned remote-access trunks accessed by remote access users on your own system.

  • Page 811: Remote Access Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-341 Summary: Remote Access Trunk Assignment Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 3a, Incoming Trunks: Remote Access Factory Setting Remote Access is not assigned Valid Entries...
  • Page 812 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-342 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Lines and Trunks. !  Ã Enter the line/trunk for remote access usage ( nnnn ). !  Ã...
  • Page 813 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-343 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Return to the System Programming menu. ÇÇ !  Select twice.
  • Page 814 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-344 Procedure: Remote Access Automatic Callback Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. !  Æ Select Remote Access. !  Specify Automatic Callback (queuing).
  • Page 815 SECURITY ALERT Your system will be highly susceptible to toll fraud if you activate the Remote Access feature without barrier codes. Lucent Technologies does not recommend doing this except in cases where your remote-access trunks are being used by external users connected to a system that is in a private network with your own (Release 6.0 and later).
  • Page 816 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-346 ARS Facility Restriction Level (Hybrid/PBX only). Allows or disallows use of outgoing trunks by assigning a facility restriction level from 0 through 6. The FRL ranges from 0 (most restrictive) to 6 (least restrictive).
  • Page 817 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-347 To assign/remove Disallowed Lists: Dial list no. Æ  Ä Å Ä PC Procedure To change calling restrictions: Ç Ç Ç Ç Select restriction Æ...
  • Page 818 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-348 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify whether you are establishing/removing a class of restrictions for !  non-tie lines/trunks or for tie and DID trunks. Ä...
  • Page 819 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-349 Restriction Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the restriction type. !  Ã Ä Select Å , or Save your entry. !  Select Return to the System Programming menu.
  • Page 820 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-350 Allowed or Disallowed Lists Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the list you want to assign ( n = 0 to 7). !  ÃSr€‚‡rÃ6ppr††) = option name selected in Step 3...
  • Page 821 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-351 The systemwide barrier code length can range from a minimum of 4 characters to a maximum of 11 characters. The default length is 7. If you enter a length that is less than 4 or greater than 11, the entry is erased and the previous entry displays on the screen.
  • Page 822 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-352 Console Procedure To establish or remove code requirements: Specify whether barrier codes are required To change barrier code length: Drop Dial code length To change barrier code:...
  • Page 823 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-353 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Remote Access. !  Ä Select an option. !  Å Select to specify whether barrier codes apply to non-tie or tie trunks and go to Establish or Remove Barrier Code...
  • Page 824 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-354 Establish or Remove Barrier Code Requirements Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Barrier Code. !  = option name selected in Step 3 Ã...
  • Page 825 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-355 Change Barrier Code Length Procedure When the systemwide barrier code length is changed, all barrier codes are erased and must be reassigned. Users are denied access to remote access trunks until new barrier codes are assigned.
  • Page 826 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-356 Change Barrier Code Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the barrier code ID number ( nn = 1 to 16). !  Sr€‚‡r6pp††Ã7h……vr…8‚qr) @‡r…Ã7h……vr…p‚qrÁˆ€ir…...
  • Page 827 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-357 Remote Access with Barrier Codes Use this procedure to change the class of restriction for individual remote access barrier codes. The class of restriction assigned to each barrier code allows or denies the use of the following system features: Restriction.
  • Page 828 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-358 Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure Dial barrier code no. Select restriction Dial barrier code Drop Dial FRL value Dial barrier code no. Æ...
  • Page 829 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-359 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Barrier Code Access. !  Æ Select an option. Å !  To change current calling restrictions, select and go to Change Current Call...
  • Page 830 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-360 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify a restriction. !  xx = barrier code number entered in Step 1 Ã Ä...
  • Page 831 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-361 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current ARS FRL ( n ). !  7h……vr…Ã8‚qrÃYY xx = barrier code entered in Step 1 Press Drop.
  • Page 832 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-362 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Enter the number of the Allowed List or Disallowed List you want !  to assign or remove ( n = 0 to 7).

  • Page 833: Automatic Route Selection

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-363 Automatic Route Selection This section contains programming procedures for the following Automatic Route Selection (ARS) features: 1 + 7-Digit Dialing Requirements ARS Tables Start and Stop Times for Subpatterns Pool Routing...
  • Page 834 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-364 Local Users Calling out on Networked Lines To implement this operation on a local system where callers will use the trunks on a remote system, use the procedures outlined in this section.
  • Page 835 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-365 1 + 7-Digit Dialing Requirements Use this procedure for calls placed within the same (home) area code as the system.
  • Page 836 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-366 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Automatic Route Selection. !  È Select ARS 1+7 Digit Dial. !  Ã Specify whether 1+7-digit dialing is required within the home area code.
  • Page 837 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-367 ARS Tables Use this procedure for the following tasks: To specify type of table (6-digit, area code, exchange, or 1 + 7-digit number) To add or change area codes to be included in each table To add or change exchanges to be included in each table A maximum of 16 tables can be established, numbered 1 through 16.
  • Page 838 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-368  È Ä PC Procedure Type table no. Select table type  Ç Ç Type entry no. Type no. Procedure: ARS Tables Console/Display Instructions Additional Information...
  • Page 839 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-369 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the table number ( nn = 1 to 16). !  Ã Dial or type [ nn ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 840 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-370 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current entry ( nnn ). !  6STÃUhiyrÃYY xx = table number entered in Step 4 xxx = entry number entered in Step 8 Press Drop.
  • Page 841 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-371 In Release 6.0 and later systems, if you are setting up ARS to allow local users to make cost-efficient calls on trunks connected to remote systems, you may wish to check with the remote system manager to ensure that routing stipulates the most cost-effective timing based on the rates at the remote location.
  • Page 842 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-372 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Automatic Route Selection. !  È Select Subpattern B Start. !  Enter the table number ( nn = 1 to 18). !  Ã...
  • Page 843 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-373 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current start time ( xxxx ). !  Press Drop. Enter the start time for Subpattern B ( hh = 00 to 23, mm = 00 to 59). !  Ã...

  • Page 844: Pool Routing

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-374 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current stop time ( xxxx ). !  Press Drop. Enter the stop time for Subpattern B ( hh = 00 to 23, mm = 00 to 59). !  Ã...
  • Page 845 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-375 2. For Dial 0 and Special Numbers N11 calls routed from systems with only private trunks, the private trunks must be assigned to the main pool, and the ARS access code of the remote system must be prepended to the dialed number (see “Dial 0 Table”...
  • Page 846 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-376 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Automatic Route Selection. !  È Select pool routing for Subpattern A or B. !  Å...
  • Page 847 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-377 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter a pool dial-out code of up to 3 digits on which to route calls. !  6STÃQ‚‚yÃUhiyrYY xx = table number entered in Step 1...

  • Page 848: Facility Restriction Level

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-378 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter a pool dial-out code of up to 3 digits on which to route calls. !  YY Y xx = table number entered in Step 1...
  • Page 849 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-379 Summary: Facility Restriction Level Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 3f, Automatic Route Selection Tables Form 3g, Automatic Route Selection Default and Special Numbers Tables Factory Setting...
  • Page 850 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-380 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Automatic Route Selection. !  È Select Facility Restriction Level for Subpattern A or B. Æ...
  • Page 851 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-381 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the restriction level ( n = 0 to 6). !  xx = table number entered in Step 1 x = route number entered in Step 1 Ã...

  • Page 852: Digit Absorption

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-382 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the restriction level ( n = 0 to 6). !  xx = table number entered in Step 1 x = route number entered in Step 1 Ã...
  • Page 853 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-383 NOTES: 1. Pool routes must be programmed before you assign digit absorption. 2. In Release 6.0 and later systems where remote users will dial out via networked lines, absorbed digits are often useful.
  • Page 854 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-384 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Automatic Route Selection. !  È Select absorb digits for Subpattern A or B. Æ...
  • Page 855 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-385 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current number of absorbed digits ( nn ). !  xx = table number entered in Step 1 x = route number entered in Step 1 Press Drop.
  • Page 856 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-386 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Erase the current number of absorbed digits ( nn ). !  6STÃUhiyrÃYY xx = table number entered in Step 1...
  • Page 857 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-387 Other Digits Use this procedure to specify other (extra) digits that must be added by the system to the beginning of the number dialed by the caller, when calls are placed on an identified route.
  • Page 858 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-388 Procedure: Other Digits Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the Tables menu. !  Select Automatic Route Selection. !  È...
  • Page 859 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-389 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Erase the current number of other digits ( n ). !  6STÃUhiyrÃYY xx = table number entered in Step 4...
  • Page 860 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-390 N11 Special Numbers Tables Use this procedure to specify Facility Restriction Level (FRL) and/or digits that must be added when emergency numbers in the N11 Special Numbers table are dialed (for example, 411, 811, or 911).
  • Page 861 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-391 Procedure: N11 Special Numbers Tables Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the Tables menu. !  Select Automatic Route Selection. !  È...
  • Page 862 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-392 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select an option. Ã !  To change the current Facility Restriction Level, select 6STÃASG and go to Change FRL Procedure.
  • Page 863 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-393 Other Digits Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current other digits ( x ). !  xx = table number entered in Step 4 Ã...
  • Page 864 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-394 Summary: Dial 0 Table Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 3g, Automatic Route Selection Default and Special Numbers Tables Factory Setting Valid Entries...
  • Page 865 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-395 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the ARS menu. !  Press More. Select Dial 0. !  È...
  • Page 866 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-396 ARS Pool Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current pool dial-out code ( xxx ). !  9vhyÃÃQ‚‚y) @‡r…‚yÃqvhy‚ˆ‡Ãp‚qr ‘‘‘...
  • Page 867 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-397 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  (QWHU Select Return to the System Programming menu. ÇÇÇ !  ([LW Select three times.
  • Page 868 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-398 Voice and/or Data Routing Use this procedure to route voice, data, or voice and data. The voice/data specification is used mainly in conjunction with PRI. See “PRI Facilities” on page 4–165 especially its subtopic, “Outgoing Tables”...
  • Page 869 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-399 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Automatic Route Selection. !  È Go to the second screen of the ARS menu. !  Press More.
  • Page 870 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-400 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  (QWHU Select Select the appropriate capability. !  xx = table number entered in Step 5 x = route number entered in Step 5 Ã...
  • Page 871 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Page 4-401 UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing This section includes programming procedures for assigning Uniform Dial Plan (UDP) routing, available for Hybrid/PBX mode in Release 6.0 and later systems only.

  • Page 872: Udp (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Page 4-402 UDP Pool Routing Before beginning this procedure, assign tandem tie or PRI trunks to pools. To do so, see “Trunks to Pools Assignment”...
  • Page 873 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Page 4-403 Procedure: UDP Pool Routing Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the Tables menu. !  Select UDP Routing. !  É...
  • Page 874 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Page 4-404 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the route number ( n = 1 to 4). !  xx = pattern number entered in Step 3 Ã...
  • Page 875 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Page 4-405 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select @‡r… . Return to the System Programming menu. ÇÇÇÇ...
  • Page 876 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Page 4-406 Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure Uhiyr† V9QÃS‚ˆ‡vt @‡r… Dial pattern no. @‡r… Dial route no. Dial restriction level  É...
  • Page 877 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Page 4-407 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select @‡r… . Enter the route number ( n = 1 to 4). !  xx = pattern number entered in Step 3 Ã...
  • Page 878 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Page 4-408 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Continue to enter a restriction level for another route in the pattern or go to !  Step 10.
  • Page 879 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Page 4-409 Summary: UDP Digit Absorption Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Non-Local Dial Plan Administration Form in the Installation Specification Factory Setting Valid Entries...
  • Page 880 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Page 4-410 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the number of the pattern ( nn = 1 to 20). !  Ã...
  • Page 881 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Page 4-411 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current number of absorbed digits ( nn ). !  xx = pattern number entered in Step 3 x = route number entered in Step 1 Æ...
  • Page 882 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Page 4-412 UDP Other Digits Use this procedure to specify other (extra) digits that must be added by the system to the beginning of the dialed digits when calls are placed on an identified route.
  • Page 883 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Page 4-413 Procedure: UDP Other Digits Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the Tables menu. !  Select UDP Routing. !  É...
  • Page 884 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Page 4-414 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the route number ( n = 1 to 4). !  V9QÃQh‡‡r…ÃYY xx = pattern number entered in Step 3 Ã...
  • Page 885 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Page 4-415 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Continue to specify other digits for another route in the current pattern or go to !  Step 11.
  • Page 886 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Page 4-416 Procedure: UDP Voice and/or Data Routing Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the Tables menu. !  Select UDP Routing. !  É...
  • Page 887 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Page 4-417 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the route number ( n = 1 to 4). !  xx = pattern number entered in Step 3 Ã...

  • Page 888: Night Service

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Page 4-418 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Return to the System Programming menu. ÇÇÇÇ !  Select four times.
  • Page 889 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Page 4-419 Summary: Night Service Group Assignment Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 9a, Night Service: Group Assignment Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries...
  • Page 890 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Page 4-420 Night Service with Outward Restriction Use this procedure to prevent unauthorized use of telephones after hours. This feature requires the user to enter a password to make a call when Night Service is activated, unless one of the lists below applies.
  • Page 891 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Page 4-421 Night Service with Time Set Use this procedure to specify the time of day and the days of the week when Night Service is to be activated and deactivated.
  • Page 892 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Page 4-422 Console Procedure To add or change start/stop time: Drop Dial start day and time Drop Dial stop day and time To activate/deactivate:  È...

  • Page 893: Labeling

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 4-423 Labeling This section contains summaries on adding or changing labels for the following: Extension Directory Lines or Trunks Posted Message Group Calling System Speed Dial Directory For detailed information see Chapter 3, “Common Administrative Procedures.”...
  • Page 894 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 4-424 Console Procedure More Dial ext. no. Drop Enter label  Ã Ã Ä È Ç Ç Ç PC Procedure Type ext. no. Type label Lines or Trunks Use this procedure to establish alphanumeric system labels for display telephone...
  • Page 895 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 4-425 Summary: Posted Message Programmable by System Manager, Integrated Administration Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 8a, Label Form: Posted Message Factory Setting First 10 messages Valid Entries...
  • Page 896 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 4-426 System Speed Dial Directory Use this procedure to establish System Speed Dial numbers for all system users. You can also use this procedure to enter the alphanumeric labels shown on display telephones (for the System Directory feature of the MLX telephone).
  • Page 897 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Print Reports Page 4-427 Print Reports Use the procedures in this section to change the language for system reports and to print the system reports. Report Language Use this procedure to change the language of the system reports.
  • Page 898 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Print Reports Page 4-428 System Dial Plan — Pools — Telephone Paging Zones — Direct Group Calling — Lines/Trunks — Stations (Extensions) Label Information —...
  • Page 899 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Print Reports Page 4-429 Disallowed Lists Disallowed Lists Assigned to Extensions Automatic Route Selection Tables Extension Directory System Directory Group Page Extension information Group Coverage Group Calling Night Service Call Pickup Groups...

  • Page 900: Print Reports

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Print Reports Page 4-430 Summary: Printing System Reports Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Not applicable Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries Any saved report Inspect...

  • Page 901: Data Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Data Features Page 4-431 Data Features This section covers the programming procedure for analog multiline telephones connected by a General-Purpose Adapter (GPA) to a data terminal and modem. Other data programming procedures can be found in earlier sections of this book (see Table...
  • Page 902 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Data Features Page 4-432 Analog Multiline Telephones at Data Workstations Use this procedure to dedicate a pair of extension jacks to provide the voice and data to an analog data workstation.
  • Page 903 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Data Features Page 4-433 Procedure: Analog Multiline Telephones at Data Workstations Console Display Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu. !  Press More.
  • Page 904 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Data Features Page 4-434 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Assign or remove the voice/data pair. !  Select @‡r… or 9ryr‡r . You may continue to assign or remove additional voice/data pairs by repeating Steps 4 and 5.
  • Page 905 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Data Features Page 4-435 Procedure: 2B Data Console Display Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the system programming menu. !  Ã...
  • Page 906 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Integrated Administration Page 4-436 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Assign or remove the 2B data pair. !  Select You may continue to assign or remove additional 2B data pairs by repeating Steps 4 and 5.
  • Page 907 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Integrated Administration Page 4-437 Common Information The switch and the applications share the following information: System numbering of extensions, trunks, and pools System labeling of the user (or other input name) associated with each extension, trunk, and pool The coverage Group that sends its calls to the applications The calling group set up for each service of the applications...

  • Page 908: Integrated Administration

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Integrated Administration Page 4-438 Table 4–6. Programming through Integrated Administration Option Factory Setting Range Automated Attendant Calling Group Call Answer Calling Group 7926 FAX Response Calling Group 7924 Information Service Calling Group 7927...

  • Page 909: Database Reconciliation Rules

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Integrated Administration Page 4-439 Table 4–7. Database Reconciliation Rules Extension appears in ... Switch Application Database Action None Extension is added to database. Can be added as AUDIX Voice Power or AUDIX Voice Power/FAX Attendant subscriber through Extension Directory screen.
  • Page 910 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 4-440 Memory Card A PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) interface slot is present on the processor module. The slot is a standard interface through which information can be added to or obtained from the system using a memory card.

  • Page 911: Pcmcia Memory Card

    Figure 4–4 shows a sample Translation card. INSERT LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES PROPRIETARY THIS MEMORY CARD CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES THAT IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OR USED EXCEPT IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE AGREEMENTS. COPYRIGHT © 1993 LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Figure 4–4.

  • Page 912: Inserting The Memory Card

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 4-442 Inserting the Card To insert the card, hold the card with the Lucent logo facing up and the arrow pointing toward the slot. See Figure 4–5 for the proper way to insert the memory card into the slot on the processor module.
  • Page 913 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 4-443 Memory Card Formatting The memory card may have to be formatted before you begin any manual or automatic backup procedures. This section details the screens and messages that appear during the format procedure.

  • Page 914: Memory Card Formatting Messages

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 4-444 Format Warning This screen appears if you respond to the system prompt to format the memory card. Å Select `r† (or press ) to begin the memory card format.
  • Page 915 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 4-445 Backup Use this procedure to make a copy of your customized system data. You should create a backup at least three times during system installation (so that programmed information is not lost), and once after each system upgrade, service technician visit, or major system reconfiguration.
  • Page 916 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 4-446 Automatic Backup Use this procedure to schedule automatic daily or weekly backups of your customized system data. See “Backup” on page –282 for detailed information and a list of errors that can occur during a backup procedure.
  • Page 917 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 4-447 Restore Use this procedure to restore system conditions that were backed up onto a translation memory card. The information in a backup file on the translation card is copied to the system.
  • Page 918 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 4-448 Copy Option 6\VWHP %DFN5HVWRUH Console Procedure Insert memory card 5HVWRUH <HV Ã  Ç Select restore file Å PC Procedure Insert memory card Select restore file Procedure: Restore...
  • Page 919 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 4-449 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Inspect the backup files present on the Memory Card. !  Press More to view additional files. aaaaaaaaaa , bbbbbbbbb = filenames xxxx = System Programming Port MM/DD HH:MM = date and time...
  • Page 920 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 4-450 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Observe the restore progress screen. !  n = filename selected in Step 5 Observe the restore file validation screen. !  n = filename selected in Step 5 The session is finished, and the...
  • Page 921 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 4-451 Card Removed after Confirmation The memory card was removed from the PCMCIA interface slot while the restore was in progress. The restore is aborted and the system performs a System Erase (frigid start).
  • Page 922 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 4-452 Card Failure Before Confirmation If the restore fails because the card is damaged, repeat the restore procedure using a different file and/or memory card. Card Failure after Confirmation n = filename selected If the restore fails because the card is damaged, the system performs a System...
  • Page 923 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 4-453 Board Mismatch n = filename selected A mismatch exists between the hardware components present on the current system and the hardware components reflected in the backup file. The restore is aborted.

  • Page 924: Memory Card

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 4-454...

  • Page 925: Centralized Telephone Programming

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Page 5-1 Centralized Telephone Programming This chapter describes centralized telephone programming for the system manager and includes the following information: Accessing centralized telephone programming Programming the features available with this function Programming a single telephone Copying programmed features from one extension to another extension...

  • Page 926: Introduction

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Introduction Page 5-2 Introduction Centralized telephone programming allows the system manager to program any feature that can be programmed by individual telephone users, or by the system operator, onto another telephone in the system.

  • Page 927: Access To Centralized Telephone Programming

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Access to Centralized Telephone Programming Page 5-3 Access to Centralized Telephone Programming Access the Centralized Programming menu from the System Programming menu. Centralized programming is performed by selecting features from the display or by using programming codes.

  • Page 928: Program Extension

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Page 5-4 The following sections explain the use of menu selections for programming a single extension (Program Extension), and for using one extension as a template for programming several extensions of the same type (Copy Extension).
  • Page 929 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Page 5-5 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Program Extension. !  Ã Specify the extension you want to program. !  Ã SP: “Entering an Extension”...
  • Page 930 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Page 5-6 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the line button to which you want to assign the feature. !  Tryrp‡Ã7ˆ‡‡‚) xxxx = extension entered in Step 2 @‘‡r†v‚ÃQ…‚t…h€ÃÃÃÃYYYY ÃÃÃÃÃQhtrÃ...

  • Page 931: Telephone Programming Codes

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Page 5-7 Programming Codes Table 5–1 provides a quick reference to the programming codes for the system features. Table 5–1. Telephone Programming Codes Feature Programming Code '!
  • Page 932 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Page 5-8 Table 5–1. Continued Feature Programming Code Coverage Cover inside and outside calls #' Cover outside calls only Receiver buttons #! + ext. no. Group Primary # + ext.
  • Page 933 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Page 5-9 Table 5–1. Continued Feature Programming Code Group Calling !! + calling group ext. no. ln-Queue Alarm button Calling group supervisor &%! Member available &%...
  • Page 934 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Page 5-10 Table 5–1. Continued Feature Programming Code "( † Night Service Notify &$& + ext. no. Send &$' + ext. no. Receive Park !! + park zone...
  • Page 935 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Page 5-11 Table 5–1. Continued Feature Programming Code Saved Number Dial "' Send/Remove Message !"Ã + ext. no. Signal (manual) System Access buttons †...
  • Page 936 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Page 5-12 Using the List Feature Menu You can use the List Feature menu to select a feature, instead of using a /LVW)HDWXUH (or press  ) programming code.

  • Page 937: Copy Extension

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Copy Extension Page 5-13 Copy Extension The system manager uses the copy extension feature to copy an extension’s programmed buttons (with some exceptions) to one or more extensions. The features are individually programmed on an extension, creating a template that can then be copied to other extensions in the system.
  • Page 938 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Copy Extension Page 5-14 Table 5–2. Continued Analog Analog and MLX Telephones Telephones Feature Telephones Only Only Coverage VMS Off Data Status Direct Voice Mail Do Not Disturb Drop** Extension Status 2 (ES2)
  • Page 939 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Copy Extension Page 5-15 Table 5–2. Continued Analog Analog and MLX Telephones Telephones Feature Telephones Only Only Park Pickup: Group Pickup: General Pickup: Extension Pickup: Line Privacy Recall...

  • Page 940: Features That Can Be Copied: Direct-Line Consoles Only

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Copy Extension Page 5-16 Table 5–3 shows the operator features than can be copied for operator consoles. QCC features cannot be copied. Table 5–3. Features That Can Be Copied: Direct-Line Consoles Only Analog Direct-Line MLX Direct-Line...
  • Page 941 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Copy Extension Page 5-17 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. !  Select Specify the number of the extension to which you want to copy !  programming features.
  • Page 942 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-18 Feature Quick Reference The following feature descriptions provide a quick reference for using centralized telephone programming. Account Code Entry Assign a button for account code entry.
  • Page 943 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-19 Auto Answer All Assign a button to direct calls to an answering device when the user is not available. Summary: Auto Answer All Telephones Analog multiline only...
  • Page 944 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-20 Automatic Line Selection Select the order in which the system makes outside lines available to the user. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: Your current Automatic Line Selection table is deleted immediately after you select this feature by either selecting...
  • Page 945 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-21 Callback With Automatic Callback turned on, the system retries calls to busy extensions or busy trunk pools. Assign a Selective Callback button to allow the system to retry calls to busy extensions or busy trunk pools on a call-by-call basis.
  • Page 946 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-22 Call Waiting With Call Waiting turned on, a user on a call will know that another call is waiting. The person at the extension hears one beep for a waiting inside call, two for an outside call.
  • Page 947 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-23 Coverage Assign a button to establish Coverage; senders’ calls are covered by receivers. Summary: Receiver Buttons–Primary, Secondary, Group This procedure assigns primary, secondary, or group coverage receivers. Telephones All (except QCC) Mode...
  • Page 948 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-24 Summary: Coverage VMS Off This procedure prevents outside calls from being sent to voice mail. Telephones Analog multiline and MLX telephones (except QCC) Mode Programmable by Users and system manager...

  • Page 949: Do Not Disturb

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-25 Do Not Disturb Assign a button to prevent calls from ringing at the telephone. Summary: Do Not Disturb Telephones Analog multiline and MLX telephones (except QCC) Mode Programmable by...
  • Page 950 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-26 Summary: Telephone Extension Status 1 and 2 Telephones Single-line, analog multiline, MLX telephones Mode Programmable by Users and system manager Programming Code ES1: ES2: Display Label...
  • Page 951 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-27 Group Calling Assign buttons to allow the calling group supervisor to monitor the number of calls in the queue or to change calling group members’ availability to take calls. Summary: Calls-In-Queue Alarm Button Telephones Analog multiline and MLX telephones...
  • Page 952 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-28 Group Page Auto Dial Button Assign a button to allow the user to broadcast an announcement to individuals or groups using a speakerphone or loudspeaker.
  • Page 953 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-29 Summary: Headset Mute Assign a button to turn microphone operation on or off for both headset and handset. Telephones MLX telephones only Mode Programmable by...
  • Page 954 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-30 Messaging Assign a button to allow users to send, receive, and post messages. Summary: Leave Message After Calling Telephones Analog multiline and MLX telephones Mode Programmable by...
  • Page 955 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-31 Summary: Receiving Messages–Delete Telephones Analog multiline display only Mode Programmable by Users and system manager !% Programming Code Display Label Summary: Receiving Messages–Next Telephones Analog multiline display only...
  • Page 956 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-32 Night Service Assign a button to activate telephone operation after normal business hours. Summary: Night Service Telephones DLC operator only Mode Programmable by Operators and system manager...
  • Page 957 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-33 Park Zone Auto Dial Assign a button to allow DLC operators to hold a call at a specified extension or park zone.
  • Page 958 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-34 Pickup Assign buttons to allow users to answer calls that are ringing, parked, or on hold anywhere in the system. Summary: Pickup–General Use, Specific Extension, Specific Line Telephones...
  • Page 959 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-35 Reminder Service Assign buttons to allow the system to make calls automatically at preset times and cancel reminder service calls and operator reminder calls that were not answered. Summary: Set, Cancel, or Missed Reminder Service Telephones...
  • Page 960 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-36 Summary: Ring Timing Options Use this procedure to establish whether and how the individual lines or all lines ring at a telephone. Telephones Analog multiline and MLX telephones Mode...
  • Page 961 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-37 Saved Number Dial Assign a button to selectively save the last number dialed and call that number again without manually redialing. Summary: Saved Number Dial Telephones Analog multiline and MLX telephones...
  • Page 962 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-38 System Access/Intercom Buttons Assign Intercom or System Access buttons on telephones. Summary: Assign System Access/Intercom Buttons Telephones Mode Intercom buttons Key, Behind Switch System Access buttons Hybrid/PBX...
  • Page 963 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-39 System Speed Dial Assign a button to dial any 3-digit speed dial code. Summary: System Speed Dial Telephones Mode Programmable by Users and system manager + 3-digit code (600–729) +...

  • Page 964: Feature Quick Reference

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-40...

  • Page 965: A Customer Support Information

    Customer Support Information Support Telephone Number In the USA only, Lucent Technologies provides a toll-tree customer Helpline (1 800 628-2888) 24 hours a day. If you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system, call the Helpline, or your Lucent Technologies representative.

  • Page 966: Communications (Doc) Interference Information

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Customer Support Information Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) Interference Information Page A-2 Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) Interference Information This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.
  • Page 967 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Customer Support Information FCC Notification and Repair Information Page A-3  If there are no directly terminated trunks, or if the only directly terminated facilities are personal lines, report the number AS5USA- 65646-PF-E.

  • Page 968: Installation And Operational Procedures

    FCC. In the event repairs are needed on this equipment, contact your authorized Lucent Technologies dealer or, in the USA only, contact the National Service Assistance Center (NSAC) at 1 800 628-2888.

  • Page 969: Doc Notification And Repair Information

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Customer Support Information DOC Notification and Repair Information Page A-5 This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded back to the Public Switched Telephone Network. Permissible exceptions are when: —...

  • Page 970: Renseignements Sur La Notification Du Ministère Des Communications Du Canada Et La Réparation

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Customer Support Information Renseignements sur la notification du ministère des Communications du Canada Page A-6 Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected.
  • Page 971 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Customer Support Information Renseignements sur la notification du ministère des Communications du Canada Page A-7 Les réparations de matériel homologué doivent être effectuées par un centre d’entretien canadien autorisé désigné par le fournisseur. La compagnie de télécommunications peut demander à...
  • Page 972 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Customer Support Information Renseignements sur la notification du ministère des Communications du Canada Page A-8 MERLIN LEGEND D.O.C. Ministère des Communications Location Label Placement du Canada emplacement de l’étiquette...

  • Page 973: Security Of Your System: Preventing Toll Fraud

    Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that...

  • Page 974: Toll Fraud Prevention

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention Page A-10 To minimize the risk of unauthorized access to your communications system: Use a nonpublished Remote Access number. Assign access codes randomly to users on a need-to-have basis, keeping a log of all authorized users and assigning one code to one person.
  • Page 975 (line/trunk) or a network operator. This is referred to as social engineering. Hackers may pose as telephone company employees and employees of Lucent Technologies or your authorized dealer. Hackers will go through a company’s trash to find directories, dialing instructions, and other information that will enable them to break into the system.
  • Page 976 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention Page A-12 Any time a call appears to be suspicious, call the Lucent Technologies GBCS Fraud Intervention Center at 1 800 628-2888 (fraud intervention for ® ® System 25, PARTNER and MERLIN systems).
  • Page 977 1809, 1900, and 976 or 1(wildcard)976. In Release 3.1 and later systems, Disallowed List number 7 does not include 800 and 1800 and 411 and 1411, but Lucent Technologies recommends that you add them. Assign all voice mail port extensions to this Disallowed List. Lucent Technologies recommends assigning Disallowed List number 7.
  • Page 978 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention Page A-14 Security Risks Associated with the Automated Attendant Feature of Voice Messaging Systems Two areas of toll fraud risk associated with the Automated Attendant feature of voice messaging systems are the following: Pooled facility (line/trunk) access codes are translated to a menu prompt to allow Remote Access.
  • Page 979 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention Page A-15 NOTE: In most cases these will be loop-start lines/trunks without reliable disconnect. The local telephone company will need to be involved to change the facilities used for RCF to ground start lines/trunks.

  • Page 980: Other Security Hints

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Customer Support Information Other Security Hints Page A-16 The maximum length should be used for each barrier code, and should be changed periodically. Barrier codes, like passwords, should consist of a random, hard-to-guess sequence of digits.
  • Page 981 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Customer Support Information Other Security Hints Page A-17 Never distribute the office telephone directory to anyone outside the company; be careful when discarding it (shred the directory). Never accept collect telephone calls.
  • Page 982 Change the access password regularly and issue it only to authorized personnel. Disconnect the maintenance port when not in use. (However, this eliminates Lucent Technologies 24-hour maintenance surveillance capability and may result in additional maintenance costs.) Create a communications system management policy concerning employee turnover and include these suggestions: —...
  • Page 983 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Customer Support Information Other Security Hints Page A-19 Choosing Passwords Passwords should be the maximum length allowed by the system. Passwords should be hard to guess and should not contain: All the same numbers (for example, 1111, 666666) Sequential characters (for example 123456) Numbers that can be associated with you or your business, such as your...

  • Page 984: Limited Warranty And Limitation Of Liability

    Warranty Date that your system is not in good working order, Lucent Technologies will without charge to you repair or replace, at its option, the system components that are not in good working order. Repair or replacement parts may be new or refurbished and will be provided on an exchange basis.

  • Page 985: Remote Administration And Maintenance

    Except as provided below, Lucent Technologies and its affiliates and suppliers shall not be liable for any incidental, special, reliance, consequential, or indirect loss or damage incurred in connection with the equipment.
  • Page 986 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Customer Support Information Remote Administration and Maintenance Page A-22 To reduce the risk of unauthorized access through Remote Administration and Maintenance, please observe the following procedures: The System Administration and Maintenance capability of a Hybrid/PBX or Key system is protected by a password.

  • Page 987: B Menu Hierarchy

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Menu Hierarchy Page B-1 Menu Hierarchy The system programming menu hierarchy details the sequence of menu screens that appear when you select the system programming options. The choice of an option on the first menu screen leads to either a second menu screen or a data- entry screen.

  • Page 988: Merlin Legend Communications System Release 6.0 Issue

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 Menu Hierarchy Page B-2...

  • Page 989: Cled Displays

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 LED Displays Page C-1 LED Displays Table C–1 indicates LED status on the MLX-20L console. LED status is indicated on the LEDs next to the 20 buttons below the display area on the system programming console.

  • Page 990: Cled Displays

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 LED Displays Page C-2 Table C–1. Line or Trunk Feature Status System LED Status* Programming Green LED Red LED Menu Option Option FLASHING ON FLASHING Lines Trunks Tie Lines Inmode Incoming tie...

  • Page 991: Telephone Feature Status For Dss Console Only

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 LED Displays Page C-3 Table C–2. Telephone Feature Status for DSS Console Only System Programming Red LED Status Menu Option Option FLASHING WINK Extensions Account Forced Account Forced Account (FACE) Code Entry...
  • Page 992 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 LED Displays Page C-4 Table C–2. Continued System Programming Red LED Status Menu Option Option FLASHING WINK Night Service Group Assign Telephone is in Telephone not in group group†...

  • Page 993: D General Feature Use And Telephone Programming

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming General Feature Use Information Page D-1 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming This appendix contains information on the general use of features for the MLX, analog multiline, and single-line telephones.

  • Page 994: D General Feature Use And Telephone Programming

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming General Feature Use Information Page D-2 Programmed Buttons Any unlabeled line button on multiline telephones can be programmed with a feature for one-touch activation. See Tables D–1 through D–4...

  • Page 995: Telephone And Operator Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 Issue 1 System Programming 555-660-111 February 1998 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone and Operator Features Page D-3 Feature Codes Feature codes are 1-, 2-, and 3-digit codes that activate features. A feature code is used by first pressing the dedicated Feature button on MLX telephones, pressing a programmed Feature button on analog multiline telephones, or dialing Æ...

  • Page 996: D–1 Telephone And Operator Features

    Table D–1. Telephone and Operator Features 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- 10/ Single- Analog Feature Prog Code Feature Code Display 7-Line Display 10D/5D Line Multi. K P B K P B K P B K P B K P B ÃÃ...
  • Page 997 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- 10/ Single- Analog Feature Prog Code Feature Code Display 7-Line Display 10D/5D Line Multi. Call Waiting K P B K P B K P B K P B K P B K P B '& Call Waiting Pickup &&! &&!
  • Page 998 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- 10/ Single- Analog Feature Prog Code Feature Code Display 7-Line Display 10D/5D Line Multi. Extension Status Direct-Line Console &% &% + DSS Status Off K P B K P B K P B button &% &% + DSS Status 1...
  • Page 999 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- 10/ Single- Analog Feature Prog Code Feature Code Display 7-Line Display 10D/5D Line Multi. Group Calling !!Ã + calling ln-Queue Alarm K P B K P B K P B K P B K P B group ext.
  • Page 1000 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- 10/ Single- Analog Feature Prog Code Feature Code Display 7-Line Display 10D/5D Line Multi. Intercom buttons Assign buttons ICOM (Default Ring) ICOM Originate Only Change button type  ( Ring Voice Language Choice K P B K P B K P B K P B...

Table of Contents